ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide

ProgressBook GradeBook
System Manager Guide
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
(This document is current for ProgressBook GradeBook v12.3 or later.)
© 2012 Software Answers, Inc. All Rights Reserved. All other company and product names
included in this material may be Trademarks, Registered Trademarks or Service Marks of the
companies with which they are associated. Software Answers, Inc. reserves the right at any time
and without notice to change these materials or any of the functions, features or specifications of
any of the software described herein.
Software Answers, Inc.
6770 Snowville Rd., Suite 200
Brecksville, Ohio 44141
www.progressbook.com
www.software-answers.com
Change Log
The following Change Log explains by Product Version, Heading, Page and Reason where
changes in the ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide have been made.
Product
Version
Heading
Page
Reason
12.3
Entire Guide
N/A
Updated some screen shots with new logo.
12.3
“Add Courses”
68
Updated screen shot to show Retain During Rollover?
option, and added information on the Retain During
Rollover? option.
12.3
“Update Courses”
70
Updated screen shot to show Retain During Rollover?
option, and added information on the Retain During
Rollover? option.
12.3
“Allow Teachers to Update
Course Roster”
71
Updated screen shot to show Retain During Rollover?
option.
12.3
“Copy Assessments”
131
Updated screen shot to show default assessment
option for GradeBook Configuration Utility.
12.3
“Set a Default Assessment for
the GradeBook Configuration
Utility for Standards-Based
Report Cards”
130
Added section on how to set a default assessment,
which will be used when running the GradeBook
Configuration Utility.
12.3
“Set Up Multiple Grade Books for
Standards-Based Report Cards”
151
Added information on how to set a default assessment,
which will be used when running the GradeBook
Configuration Utility.
12.3
“Class Assignment Marks Admin
Report”
173
Updated screen shot to display Report Viewer instead
of ProgressBook Report Viewer.
12.3
“Homework and Marks Posted to
Parent Access Admin Report”
176
Updated screen shot to display Report Viewer instead
of ProgressBook Report Viewer.
12.3
“Homework and Marks Posted to
Parent Access Admin Report”
176
Updated screen shot to display Printed from
ProgressBook instead of the old ProgressBook logo.
12.3
“Report Card Marks Admin
Report”
179
Updated screen shot to display Report Viewer instead
of ProgressBook Report Viewer.
12.3
“Section Info Meeting Times
Integration Report”
183
Updated screen shot to display Report Viewer instead
of ProgressBook Report Viewer.
12.3
“Student Daily Attendance
Integration Report”
186
Updated screen shot to display Report Viewer instead
of ProgressBook Report Viewer.
12.3
“Student Demographics Report”
189
Updated screen shot to display Report Viewer instead
of ProgressBook Report Viewer.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
i
Change Log
Product
Version
ii
Heading
Page
Reason
12.3
“Student Demographics Report”
189
Updated screen shot to display Report Viewer instead
of ProgressBook Report Viewer, and updated screen
shot to display Printed from ProgressBook instead of
the old ProgressBook logo.
12.3
“Student Section Enrollment
Integration Report”
192
Updated screen shot to display Report Viewer instead
of ProgressBook Report Viewer.
12.3
“YTD (Year-to-Date) Final Grade
Admin Report”
195
Updated screen shot to display Report Viewer instead
of ProgressBook Report Viewer.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Table of Contents
Change Log
i
About this Guide
1
Initial District Setup
3
Set Up School District Information .............................................................................. 3
Set Up School Information .......................................................................................... 4
ProgressBook GradeBook Features ........................................................................... 5
District Features .................................................................................................... 5
School Features .................................................................................................... 7
Set Up Data Integration............................................................................................. 10
Disable Data Integration for District .....................................................................11
Disable Data Integration for School .....................................................................11
Named Codes Overview ........................................................................................... 12
Associate Named Codes Lists with Schools ............................................................. 13
Add Instructional Cycle Codes .................................................................................. 14
Copy Named Codes to New List ......................................................................... 15
Modify Named Codes.......................................................................................... 15
Delete Individual Named Codes from List ........................................................... 15
Add Attendance Day Codes ...................................................................................... 16
Create School Calendars .......................................................................................... 16
Edit Calendar Month ................................................................................................. 18
Assign Instructional Cycles ....................................................................................... 20
Associate Schools with Calendars ............................................................................ 21
Set Up Rounding Preferences for Student Averages................................................ 22
Set Up Rounding for Grade Book ....................................................................... 22
Make Student Pictures Available on Seating Chart................................................... 23
Create New Virtual Directory............................................................................... 23
Create New Directory .......................................................................................... 25
Add Directory to ProgressBook GradeBook........................................................ 26
Audit User Activity ..................................................................................................... 26
View User Login/Logout Activity .......................................................................... 26
Install ProgressBook GradeBook Audit Logs ...................................................... 27
Estimate Amount of Drive Space Required to Maintain Audit Log Records ........ 28
Modify Audit Log Settings in Windows Server 2003............................................ 29
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
iii
Modify Audit Log Settings in Windows Server 2008 ........................................... 30
Enable Audit Log ................................................................................................. 31
View Changes Made in ProgressBook GradeBook in Audit Log......................... 32
Disable Audit Log ............................................................................................... 33
Grading Setup
35
Add Reporting Periods.............................................................................................. 35
Enter Report Card Entry Dates ........................................................................... 36
Edit Reporting Periods ........................................................................................ 37
Delete Reporting Periods .................................................................................... 37
Export Report Card Grades on Demand for Districts that Run Batch Integration..... 37
Set Up Cross References for Reporting Periods ...................................................... 39
Mark Types ............................................................................................................... 40
Add Mark Types .................................................................................................. 41
Edit Mark Types .................................................................................................. 43
Delete Mark Types .............................................................................................. 44
Grading Scales ......................................................................................................... 44
Add Grading Scales ............................................................................................ 45
Copy Grading Scales .......................................................................................... 46
Edit Grading Scales ............................................................................................ 46
Delete Grading Scales ........................................................................................ 47
Maintain Staff Accounts
49
ProgressBook GradeBook User Roles ..................................................................... 49
Search for Staff ......................................................................................................... 50
Add Staff ................................................................................................................... 50
Edit Staff ................................................................................................................... 54
Transfer Staff Activity ................................................................................................ 55
Delete Staff ............................................................................................................... 57
Help a Teacher.......................................................................................................... 59
Maintain District
61
Add Rooms ............................................................................................................... 61
Delete Rooms ..................................................................................................... 62
Set Up Homerooms .................................................................................................. 62
Add Teachers to Homerooms.............................................................................. 63
Remove Teachers from Homerooms .................................................................. 64
Add Students to Homeroom Roster .................................................................... 65
iv
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Remove Students from Homeroom Roster ......................................................... 66
Set Required Homerooms for Daily Attendance ................................................. 66
Add Courses ............................................................................................................. 68
Update Courses ........................................................................................................ 70
Allow Teachers to Update Course Roster ........................................................... 71
Delete Courses ................................................................................................... 72
Add Classes.............................................................................................................. 73
Add Staff to Classes............................................................................................ 75
Schedule Classes ............................................................................................... 77
Add Students to Classes..................................................................................... 80
Update Classes......................................................................................................... 81
Modify Class Schedule ....................................................................................... 84
Delete Students from Class Roster..................................................................... 86
Delete Classes .................................................................................................... 87
Update Lunch Choices.............................................................................................. 88
Maintain Period/Block Codes.................................................................................... 88
Maintain Students
91
Student-Related Named Codes ................................................................................ 91
Add Admission Codes............................................................................................... 91
Add Withdrawal Codes ............................................................................................. 92
Add Student Status Codes........................................................................................ 93
Add Address Types Codes........................................................................................ 93
Add Contact Type Codes .......................................................................................... 94
Copy Named Codes to New List............................................................................... 95
Modify Named Codes ............................................................................................... 95
Delete Individual Named Codes from List................................................................. 96
Add Students ............................................................................................................ 96
Add Contacts to Students ................................................................................... 98
Add Addresses to Students................................................................................. 98
Add Enrollment Entry to Students ....................................................................... 99
Update Students ..................................................................................................... 100
Attendance Setup
103
Attendance-Related Named Codes ........................................................................ 103
Add Absence Types Codes..................................................................................... 104
Add Absence Totals Codes ..................................................................................... 105
Add Absence Reason Codes .................................................................................. 107
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
v
Attendance Day Codes ........................................................................................... 107
Add Attendance Note Codes................................................................................... 108
Copy Named Codes to New List............................................................................. 109
Modify Named Codes ............................................................................................. 109
Delete Individual Named Codes from List................................................................110
Add Attendance Assessments to Report Cards .......................................................110
Associate Assessments with Reporting Periods ......................................................112
Associate Assessments with Mapping Identifiers in Reporting Periods...................113
Update Attendance Totals During Data Integration..................................................114
Report Cards and Interims
115
Create Report Cards/Interims ..................................................................................116
Assign Grade Levels to Schools ....................................................................... 121
Assign Order to Reporting Periods ................................................................... 122
Add Courses to Report Cards ........................................................................... 123
Add Assessments to Report Cards ................................................................... 125
Associate Assessments with Reporting Periods ............................................... 132
Determine Protected Marks .............................................................................. 133
System Calculations ......................................................................................... 134
Assign Grade Entry Method to Assessments and Reporting Periods ............... 136
Set Up Year to Date (YTD) Calculation Method ................................................ 141
Format Report Card Templates......................................................................... 145
Associate Assessments with Mapping Identifiers in Reporting Periods ............ 148
Add Messages to Report Cards ........................................................................ 149
Compile Report Cards ...................................................................................... 150
Set Up Multiple Grade Books for Standards-Based Report Cards ......................... 151
Copy Report Cards ................................................................................................. 153
Delete Report Cards ............................................................................................... 153
General Maintenance
155
Check Software Version.......................................................................................... 155
Recalculate Grade Books ....................................................................................... 155
Delete Students ...................................................................................................... 156
Delete Students Individually.............................................................................. 156
Mass Delete Students ....................................................................................... 158
Associate District Grade Levels with State Grade Levels....................................... 160
Update Email Address ............................................................................................ 161
Password Authentication......................................................................................... 162
vi
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Enable ProgressBook GradeBook Authentication ............................................ 162
Password Settings .................................................................................................. 163
Modify Password Security Settings in Web.config File ..................................... 163
Modify Password Security Settings in DistrictLogin Table................................. 164
Change Password................................................................................................... 166
Use ProgressBook GradeBook Help ...................................................................... 167
Enable Default District ID Setting............................................................................ 168
Reports
169
Report Builder Reports ........................................................................................... 170
Class Assignment Marks Admin Report ............................................................ 173
Homework and Marks Posted to Parent Access Admin Report ........................ 176
Report Card Marks Admin Report ..................................................................... 179
Section Info Meeting Times Integration Report ................................................. 183
Student Daily Attendance Integration Report .................................................... 186
Student Demographics Report.......................................................................... 189
Student Section Enrollment Integration Report................................................. 192
YTD (Year-to-Date) Final Grade Admin Report................................................. 195
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
199
Standard Elementary Report Card (8 1/2 x 11 portrait) .......................................... 199
Standard Elementary Report Card (8 1/2x14 portrait) ............................................ 216
Standard Elementary Report Card (8 1/2x11 landscape, 2 columns)..................... 231
Standard Elementary Report Card (Legal tri-fold) .................................................. 245
Standard Elementary Report Card (11x17 landscape, 2 columns)......................... 258
Appendix B: Sample Traditional Report Card
273
Create Report Cards – General Tab ....................................................................... 273
Assign Grade Levels to Schools – Grade Levels Tab............................................. 274
Assign Order to Reporting Periods – Periods Tab .................................................. 275
Add Assessments – Assessments Tab ................................................................... 276
Associate Assessments with Reporting Periods – Requirements Tab .................... 277
Determine Protected Marks – Protected Marks Tab ............................................... 278
Assign Grade Entry Methods to Assessments and Reporting
Periods – Advanced Calcs Tab ............................................................................... 279
Set Up Average Calculation Methods for System Calculations – System
Calcs Tab ................................................................................................................ 279
Set Up Year to Date Calculation Method ................................................................ 282
Compile Report Card .............................................................................................. 283
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
vii
Appendix C: Sample Standards-Based Report Card
287
Create Report Cards – General Tab ....................................................................... 288
Assign Grade Levels to Schools – Grade Levels Tab............................................. 289
Assign Order to Reporting Periods – Periods Tab .................................................. 290
Add Courses – Courses Tab ................................................................................... 291
Search for Courses ........................................................................................... 292
Continue to Add Courses .................................................................................. 294
Add Assessments – Assessments Tab ................................................................... 295
Copy Assessments ........................................................................................... 302
Continue to Add Assessments .......................................................................... 303
Associate Assessments with Reporting Periods – Requirements Tab .................... 305
Determine Protected Marks – Protected Marks Tab ............................................... 306
Set Up Average Calculation Method – Average Calcs Tab ..................................... 307
Add Messages – Messages Tab ............................................................................. 308
Format Templates – Templates Tab ........................................................................ 309
Preview Report Card............................................................................................... 312
Adjust Template to Eliminate Third Page .......................................................... 314
Preview Adjusted Columns ............................................................................... 315
Add Subject Continued Assessments ............................................................... 315
Preview Subject Continued Assessments......................................................... 316
Add End of Year Placement to Template........................................................... 316
Preview End of Year Placement........................................................................ 317
Adjust Messages Using RTF Code ................................................................... 318
Preview Messages Using RTF Code ................................................................ 319
Associate Assessments with Mapping Identifiers in Reporting
Periods – Mappings Tab ......................................................................................... 320
Check Spelling on Report Card .............................................................................. 323
Compile Report Card .............................................................................................. 324
viii
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
About this Guide
The purpose of this guide is to assist ProgressBook GradeBook users with Master or School
Administrator privileges in setting up and maintaining their ProgressBook GradeBook system. The
chapters in this guide provide reference and procedural information about related types of system
functionality beginning with the tasks you need to perform the first time you set up your system,
such as named codes, school calendars, reporting periods, mark types and grading scales. In
continuing to prepare your system, you will find information on setting up and maintaining staff and
student accounts, rooms, courses and classes.
The Parent Access Administration chapter includes detailed information about available options
for setting up and maintaining your Parent Access Web Site.
In addition, you will find an explanation of proper attendance setup and its impact on the display
of attendance totals on report cards, as well as procedures for creating report cards in the Report
Card Builder.
Finally, appendices in the guide include report card template pieces available for each report card
template size and layout option that you can use to format printed report cards, as well as
step-by-step examples for creating both traditional and standards-based report cards.
Administrator Home Page
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
1
About this Guide
This page intentionally left blank.
2
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Initial District Setup
This chapter describes how to enter your school district and school information in ProgressBook
GradeBook, so the information displays properly on report cards. You can choose to enable any
of available features to suit your district’s and individual school’s needs. In addition, this chapter
describes how to set up and maintain the calendars used by your district as well as the named
codes used in the calendars. Proper calendar setup is important for attendance totaling.
Set Up School District Information
School district information must be set up in your system, so the district, school names and
addresses and principal names display on certain ProgressBook SpecialServices forms and
report cards. If you leave the District Name column empty, the principal's name will not display
when printing standards-based report cards.
If your school district is integrated with a student information system, ProgressBook GradeBook
loads data, such as student accounts, class schedules, staff accounts and attendance records for
the entire district directly from the student information system.
To begin setting up data integration, if applicable, designate the appropriate student information
system with which your district is integrated. Then complete the other steps required to enable
data integration on the Data Integration Setup screen. See “Set Up Data Integration” .
1. On the Administrator Home Page under District Setup, select District.
2. On the District Setup screen in the District Name column, click in the empty field and enter
the district name.
3. In the Superintendent Name field, enter the district superintendent's name.
4. If your school district is integrated with a student information system in the Integration
System list, select the appropriate student information system.
The selection of the appropriate student information system here enables data integration
for the entire district and allows it to be the only option available for the individual schools
on the Data Integration Setup screen.
Note: If you select None in the Integration System list on this screen, the
integration system for each school is automatically set to None on the Data
Integration Setup screen.
5. Click Save.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
3
Initial District Setup
Integration System on the District Setup Screen
Set Up School Information
If your school district is integrated with a student information system, schools are imported into
ProgressBook GradeBook from that system. Make any necessary changes in the student
information system. If your school district is not integrated with a student information system, you
can make changes to schools as needed.
A check mark in the view-only Active column indicates that the school is active in the District
database. However, you cannot deactivate a school on this screen.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under District Setup, click Schools.
2. On the Schools screen at the bottom of the screen, click the Add a School link.
3. In the Add a School window in the School Name field, type the new school name.
4. In the District School ID field, enter the district's school identification number.
Note: If your school does not integrate with a student information system, the
District School ID can be any unique alphanumeric identification.
5. In the School Short Name field, enter an abbreviation.
Note: The school short name should be meaningful to the users as it will be used
in list options for staff searches and other related tasks.
6. In the School Address field, enter the school's address.
7. In the City, State and Zip fields, enter the city, state and zip code where the school is
located.
8. In the Phone Number field, enter the school's phone number.
9. In the Principal's Name field, enter the principal's name for the school.
Note: Entering the principal name here will not allow it to display on report cards.
10. In the State School ID list, select the school's state ID.
Note: If your school is integrated with a student information system, your school's
state ID will automatically populate. If your school does not integrate with a
student information system, N/A displays in this list.
11. Click Update.
4
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Initial District Setup
The Delete and Add a New School links display at the bottom of the screen.
Update a School Window
12. To continue adding schools, repeat step 2 through step 11.
13. Close the Update a School window.
Schools Screen
ProgressBook GradeBook Features
ProgressBook GradeBook users with Master or School Administrator privileges can enable or
disable any of the available features for your school district and each individual school, as desired.
District Features
The following district features are available:
•
Debugging for DASL (Keep off unless testing) – This option should be disabled at all
times. The option is used for troubleshooting only by school districts that integrate with
the DASL student information system.
•
Enable Attendance Short Comments – This option is used by school districts that
integrate with the Student Sphere student information system. The option allows a
second comment field to be used on the Absence Queue screen.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
5
Initial District Setup
•
Import DASL External Student Status Code – For school districts integrated with the
DASL student information system, this option allows the External Student Status Code to
be imported into ProgressBook GradeBook.
•
Lunch Counts – This option provides the ability for teachers to enter lunch counts on the
Lunch Counts screen. The lunch choices are customizable for individual schools and can
be entered/edited by users with the Cafeteria, Principal, School Support, School
Administrator and Master roles.
•
Parent/Student Access – This option allows access to the Parent Access Web Site.
Staff can access the site; however, parents and students will only be able to access it
once they have been provided with user names and passwords.
•
SpecialServices – This option provides access to ProgressBook SpecialServices
through a link in the Web banner for all users. Additional configuration of that system will
be necessary. See SpecialServices System Manager Guide for more details.
•
Staff Password Changes – This option provides users with the ability to change their
password on the Change Password screen.
•
Standards – This option allows the use of academic standards with lesson plans and
assignments. ProgressBook GradeBook provides state academic standards for core
subjects. Additional content areas can be entered/edited by users with the Curriculum,
School Administrator and Master roles.
•
Teacher Roster Setup for All Courses – This option provides teachers with the ability to
add students to their class rosters. If integrated with a student information system, this
option should be turned off. When this feature is disabled, teachers can still be given the
ability to update class rosters on an individual course basis if the ProgressBook
GradeBook system manager selects that option on the Update Course window.
Available District Features on the Feature Selection Screen
Enable and Disable District Features
1. On the Administrator Home Page under District Setup, select District Features.
2. On the Feature Selection screen in the Use? column, select the check box for each of the
features you want to enable.
3. Click Save.
Note: To disable the feature, deselect the check box in the Use? column, and
click Save.
6
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Initial District Setup
School Features
For ProgressBook GradeBook users with School Administrator privileges, only the schools to
which you have been assigned display on the screen. Enabling or disabling these features affects
the functionality to which other ProgressBook GradeBook users have access, which is explained
in detail for each option. If your school district is integrated with a student information system,
make sure you also select the appropriate integration system for each school on the Data
Integration Setup screen. See “Set Up Data Integration” .
Period Attendance Tab
The following school features are available on the Period Attendance tab:
•
Enable – Provides schools with the ability to take period attendance in classes on the
Period Attendance and Seating Chart screens. The Period Attendance links display in the
Web site banner in the Period Attendance view on the Grade Book Grid. When this
feature is disabled, the Period Attendance link does not display on the Teacher Home
Page; the Period Attendance and Period Attendance by Seating Chart links do not
display on the Class Dashboard; the Period Attendance option is not available in the View
list on the Grade Book Grid; and the Allow period attendance to be taken with this chart
option and
is not available on the Seating Chart.
•
Prior Day – Allows schools to provide teachers with the ability to enter or modify period
attendance for days prior to the current day on the Period Attendance screen and Seating
Chart screens. See “Set Prior Days to Change Period Attendance” .
•
Live Integration – Allows schools to read and save period attendance and period
attendance by block data from the student information system, where available on a
real-time basis. This option is enabled only if your district runs live period attendance.
•
By Block – Provides teachers with the ability to take period attendance by block in
classes that meet for multiple blocks on the Period Attendance screen. The Enable
feature must be selected for this option to work. When this feature is enabled and the
class meets for multiple blocks, each block displays in a separate column in which the
teacher can enter an attendance code. This icon
displays on the Period Attendance
screen to allow teachers to set the desired default view. The Take Attendance by Block
link displays in the Web site banner on the Seating Chart.
•
Auto-Roster – Automatically updates the class roster with students from the SMS
student information system when the teacher enters the Period Attendance screen to
take period attendance. This option is enabled by default for all high schools and disabled
by default for all other schools.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
7
Initial District Setup
Period Attendance Features on the Period Attendance Tab on the School Feature Setup
Screen
Set Prior Days to Change Period Attendance
You can specify for all schools or each school individually the number of days prior to today in
which teachers can enter or modify period attendance on the Period Attendance screen or Seating
Chart.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under District Setup, click School Features.
2. To set the number of days prior to today that users can enter or modify period attendance
for all the schools in the district, on the School Feature Setup screen Period Attendance
tab, in the Prior Day column in the All schools row, click the multiple or 365 day(s) link.
Note: To set the number of days prior to today that you can enter or modify period
attendance for an individual school, click the 365 day(s) link in the Prior Day
column for that school.
3. In the Number of days to allow field, type the appropriate number of days. The default is
365.
4. Click Update.
The number of prior days is updated for the selected schools and the following message
displays, “Feature updated successfully.”
Note: It is not necessary to click Save.
8
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Initial District Setup
Period Attendance Tab on the School Feature Setup Screen
Teachers cannot enter or modify period attendance on the Period Attendance screen or Seating
Chart on a day that is past the number of days set to allow for period attendance. On the Period
Attendance screen in the Class Attendance list, the list of attendance codes is not available, and
the following message displays, “Altering period attendance in the past is only available for X
day(s) prior to the current date.”
Daily Attendance Tab
The following school features are available on the Daily Attendance tab:
•
Offer Daily Attendance – Provides teachers with the ability to take daily attendance in
classes on the Daily Attendance screen and Seating Chart. When this feature is disabled,
the Daily Attendance link does not display on the Teacher Home Page; the Daily
Attendance and Daily Attendance by Seating Chart links do not display on the Class
Dashboard; and the Allow daily attendance to be taken with this chart option and
not available on the Seating Chart.
is
•
Allow Prior Day Changes – Provide teachers with the ability to enter and, if the school is
not integrated with a student information system, to modify daily attendance for days prior
to the current day on the Daily Attendance screen and Seating Chart.
•
Enable Live SIS Integration – Allows schools to read and save daily attendance data
from your student information system, where available on a real-time basis. This option is
enabled only if your district runs live daily attendance.
Daily Attendance Tab on the School Feature Setup Screen
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
9
Initial District Setup
Reports Tab
Schools can enable Report Builder reports on the Reports tab.
Reports Tab on the School Feature Setup Screen
Enable and Disable School Features
1. On the Administrator Home Page under District Setup, select School Features.
2. On the School Feature Setup screen, select the Period Attendance, Daily Attendance
or Reports tab.
3. In the appropriate feature column, select the check box for each school for which you
want to enable the feature.
Note: To apply a feature to all the schools in the list at once, select the check box
above the name of the feature, and click Save.
4. Click Save.
Note: To disable the feature for a school, deselect the check box in the feature
column, and click Save.
Set Up Data Integration
If your school district is integrated with a student information system and you have already
selected the appropriate integration system for the district on the District Setup screen, you can
enable data integration for each school building as needed.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under Tools, click Data Integration Status.
2. On the Data Integration Setup screen in the Integration System column, select the
appropriate student information system for each building.
3. Click Save.
4. You may perform any of the following optional steps while setting up data integration for
the exchange of attendance codes and report card grades with your student information
system:
•
10
To enable live daily attendance integration, click the Click here to modify
Integration status link, and then on the Daily Attendance tab on the School Feature
Setup screen, select the check box in the Offer Daily Attendance column for the
appropriate school. See “Daily Attendance Tab” .
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Initial District Setup
•
To enable period attendance integration, click the Click here to modify Integration
status link, select the Period Attendance tab on the School Feature Setup screen,
and then select the check box in the Offer Period Attendance column for the
appropriate school. See “Period Attendance Tab” .
•
To export report card grades to the student information system, make sure you have
selected the appropriate data integration method and source options on the General
tab while creating the report card. See “Create Report Cards/Interims” .
Data Integrations Setup Screen
Disable Data Integration for District
It is recommended to disable data integration for the entire school district at the end of the school
year after final report card grades have been completed to prevent data, such as student
accounts, class schedules, staff accounts and attendance records, from being loaded into
ProgressBook GradeBook directly from the student information system before the beginning of
the next school year.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under District Setup, click District.
2. On the District Setup screen in the Integration System column, select None for the district.
The following message displays: "Changing the integration system turns off integration at
all schools. To re-enable integration for one or more schools, go to the Data Integration
Setup Page."
3. Click Save.
Disable Data Integration for School
You can disable data integration for an individual school building at any time. Disabling data
integration on this screen overrides any data integration options you may have already selected
on the Daily Attendance or Period Attendance tabs on the School Feature Setup screen. In the
Report Card Builder, the student information system does not display in the data integration
source list on the General tab, and the External Reference column does not display on the
Assessments tab if you disable data integration for all schools on this screen.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
11
Initial District Setup
1. On the Administrator Home Page under Tools, select Data Integration Status.
2. On the Data Integration Setup screen in the Integration System column, select None for
the appropriate school building.
3. Click Save.
Named Codes Overview
Named codes lists are set up and maintained to specify the attendance-related codes, student
status and other codes used in each school in your district. ProgressBook GradeBook provides
default named codes groups for you to use that remain in the system regardless of whether or not
your district is integrated with a student information system. Once you have set up the named
codes lists, they remain in your system from year to year.
Depending on the student information system in which your school district is integrated, certain
named codes lists are imported into ProgressBook GradeBook from that system. If changes are
necessary, you should make them to the named codes lists in that student information system.
Therefore, it is not recommended to create customized named codes lists in ProgressBook
GradeBook.
If your school district is not integrated with a student information system, you must set up the
named codes lists during the initial ProgressBook GradeBook setup. You can use the predefined
named codes groups provided by ProgressBook GradeBook, or you can add customized named
codes lists to the default groups to suit your needs.
The specific code lists and their uses are distributed throughout this manual within the subjects to
which they are related. For example, most attendance codes are covered in the Attendance
chapter, while student codes are covered in the Maintain Students chapter. For your reference,
all of the Named Codes Lists are listed in “Named Codes Lists” along with the page numbers
where you can find more detailed information.
Named Codes Lists
Named Codes
12
Page
Instructional Cycle Codes
14
Attendance Day Codes
16
Period/Block Codes
88
Admission Codes
91
Withdrawal Codes
92
Student Status Codes
93
Address Type Codes
93
Contact Type Codes
94
Absence Types Codes
104
Absence Totals Codes
105
Absence Reason Codes
107
Attendance Note Codes
108
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Initial District Setup
Associate Named Codes Lists with Schools
Once you have set up or imported your Named Codes Lists into ProgressBook GradeBook, the
codes must be associated with the appropriate school buildings within your district. For example,
your district may use different attendance codes in the secondary schools than in the primary
schools. Depending on the student information system in which your school district is integrated,
the association of schools with named codes may have already been imported, and you do not
have to follow the following procedure.
Also, depending on the student information system in which your school district is integrated,
Activity Codes and Activity Groups may be associated with specific codes or may not be used at
all.
If your school district is not integrated with a student information system, you must associate a
school with a named codes list for each named code group. If you do not associate named codes
with schools, attendance information will not display appropriately throughout ProgressBook
GradeBook.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under the Named Codes section, click School Named
Codes.
2. On the School Named Codes screen in the School list, select the school you want to
associate with a named codes list.
3. In the Code List column, select the appropriate named codes list to associate with the
Code Group for the school.
4. Continue associating named codes lists with code groups the school uses.
5. Click Save.
6. To continue associating named codes lists with code groups for all the schools in the
district, repeat step 2 through step 5.
Note: If the Absence Totals and Absences Types named codes lists selected do
not match, the following message displays at the bottom of the screen: “The
Absence Types defined in the Absence Totals used for attendance totaling do not
match the selected Absence Types. This may cause incorrect attendance totaling.
Check the following Absence Totals calculation(s): lists the affected Absence
Types.”
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
13
Initial District Setup
School Named Codes Screen
Add Instructional Cycle Codes
Instructional cycle codes represent the instructional cycle that is used in the school calendar. The
instructional cycle is the set of days that school meets during the week.
By default, the Monday through Friday instructional cycles will already be set up in ProgressBook
GradeBook, you may need to enter instructional cycle codes during the initial ProgressBook
GradeBook setup regardless of whether or not your district is integrated with a student information
system if you use something other than the standard Monday through Friday codes. Once you
have set up the list, it remains in your system from year to year.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under the Named Codes section, click Instructional
Cycles.
2. On the Instructional Cycles screen in the Name list, select the appropriate instructional
cycle.
3. In the Code column, type the code (up to 2 characters) representing the day.
4. In the Description column, type the name of the day.
Note: The description may be the actual day of the week, such as Monday, or it
may be an internal description, such as Day 1, based on your district's calendar
cycle.
5. In the Seq# column, type the number representing the order in which the cycle day should
display.
6. Click Save.
14
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Initial District Setup
Instructional Cycles Screen
Copy Named Codes to New List
1. On the Instructional Cycles screen in the Name list, select the default named codes list.
2. In the Copy to new List field, type the name of the list to which you want to copy.
3. Click Go.
The name entered in the Copy to new list field displays in the Name list.
Modify Named Codes
You should only modify the named codes in ProgressBook GradeBook if your school district is not
integrated with a student information system.
Depending on the student information system in which your school district may be integrated, the
named codes may be imported into ProgressBook GradeBook from that system. You should
make any necessary changes to named codes in the student information system.
1. On the Instructional Cycles screen in the Name list, select the appropriate named codes
list.
2. Change the code, description or sequence number, as needed.
3. Click Save.
Delete Individual Named Codes from List
You should only delete individual codes from a named codes list in ProgressBook GradeBook if
your school district is not integrated with a student information system.
1. On the Instructional Cycles screen in the Delete column, click the check box next to the
code you want to remove from the list.
2. Click Save.
Note: You cannot delete a cycle day code that has been associated with a
calendar day.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
15
Initial District Setup
Add Attendance Day Codes
Attendance Days codes represent the types of days that school is in session. Each day type, for
example, full day, half day and holiday, is assigned a value. The value of the type of day is used
in attendance calculations. These codes display on the Attendance by Student and Update
Absence Info screens.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under the Named Codes section, click Attendance
Days.
2. On the Attendance Day Codes screen in the Name list, select the appropriate named
codes list.
3. In the Code column, type the new code.
4. In the Description column, type the description of the code.
5. In the Multiplier list, select a value that represents the code.
Note: The value is the number, such as 1 for a full day or 0.5 for a half day, used
in calculating attendance totals.
6. In the appropriate color box, select the option button to designate the color that
represents the day as it appears on the attendance calendars.
7. Click Save.
8. To continue adding codes, repeat step 3 through step 7.
Attendance Day Codes
Create School Calendars
The school calendar includes the total number of days that school meets for the year. You can
create a separate calendar for each school building, which may be required by some school
districts, and then associate the school with the appropriate calendar. You can also have different
calendars for different grade levels in the same building. For example, the kindergarten calendar
may have a different start date than the start date on the calendar used by the first through fourth
grades. You must create a school calendar whether or not your school district is integrated with a
16
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Initial District Setup
student information system. School calendars may be imported through integration with the
student information system; however, ongoing maintenance must still be done in ProgressBook
GradeBook throughout the school year.
Once the calendar has been created Saturday and Sunday are considered off days. If your school
district or school building meets on Saturday or Sunday, you must edit the calendar to reflect that
change.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under Annual Setup, click School Calendars.
2. On the Calendar List screen in the Description column, type the name of new calendar in
the blank cell.
3. In the Cal# column, type a number.
Note: If your school district is integrated with certain student information systems,
this number may already be entered.
4. In the Total Days column, type the number of days that school meets during the year.
Note: This number of days is used in the Days Possible and Days Present
calculations that can be selected on the Absence Totals screen.
5. In the Instructional Cycle list, select the appropriate instructional cycle.
Note: The instructional cycles created on the Named Codes screen displays in
this list.
6. In the Cycle Type list, select the appropriate cycle type option:
•
Mon-Fri – Use this when the instructional cycle is five days and Mondays are always
the start of the cycle. This is the default option.
•
Rotating – The cycle is applied consecutively throughout the calendar.
Note: The codes set up on the Attendance Day Codes screen display in this list.
7. In the Attendance Days list, select the appropriate attendance days named codes.
8. In the Start Month list, select the month that school begins.
9. In the Start Day list, select the day that school begins.
10. In the School Year list, select the year the calendar represents.
11. Click Save.
12. Proceed to edit the calendar to complete the calendar setup.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
17
Initial District Setup
Calendar List Screen
Edit Calendar Month
When a new calendar has been created, Mondays through Fridays are considered full days.
ProgressBook GradeBook automatically calculates the last day of the school calendar based on
the start date and the total number of days in the calendar. You must edit the calendar to reflect
the days that school is not in session or any other special days and then adjust the end date based
on those days. The colors that display at the bottom of the School Calendar screen have been set
up on the Attendance Day Codes screen.
Once you have completely edited the calendar, you must associate the calendar with the school
buildings that use the calendar.
1. On the Calendar List screen, select the Calendar Days tab.
Note: On the School Calendar screen, you can also click
calendar you want to edit.
next to the
2. On the School Calendar screen in the Select a Calendar list, select the appropriate
calendar.
Notice that the Selected Calendar, Calendar Start and Cycle Type display across the top
of the calendar. The months in the calendar display along the left side of the calendar
beginning with the first month in the school year. Cycle day codes that are included in the
instructional cycle that is associated with this calendar display in each day. The
background color of each day is denoted by the type of attendance day. Keys explaining
the Attendance Days and Instructional Cycle Days displays across the bottom of the
screen.
18
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Initial District Setup
Monday - Friday School Calendar
Rotating Calendar
3. On the left side of the screen, click the month you want to edit.
4. On the Edit Calendar Month screen at the bottom of the screen, select an attendance day
option.
5. In the date box, click directly on the number to which you want to apply that option.
The color representing that option displays in the date box.
Note: You can select multiple dates for that specific attendance day option.
Note: You can navigate to future months by clicking the forward arrow near the
month title.
6. Click Save.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
19
Initial District Setup
Edit Calendar Month Screen
7. To continue applying attendance day options, perform step 5 through step 6.
8. In the Web site banner, click the Back to main calendar page link to return to the School
Calendar screen.
9. To continue editing calendar days, perform step 3 through step 6.
10. Proceed to assign instructional cycles.
Assign Instructional Cycles
An instructional cycle is the set of days that school meets during the week. You should assign an
instructional cycle to your school’s calendar when you are setting it up at the beginning of the
school year. You may need to reassign cycle days during the initial set up after you modify the
calendar to reflect holidays and other time off. You can also reassign cycle days in an instructional
cycle associated with a specific calendar at any time during the school year in the event that
school did not meet because of a weather emergency, for example.
1. On the School Calendar screen in the Select a Calendar list, select the appropriate
calendar.
2. At the bottom of the screen, click the Assign Instructional Cycle Days link.
The Assign Instructional Cycles window displays.
3. On Assign Instructional Cycles window, verify that the calendar selected on the School
Calendar screen displays in the Calendar list.
4. If the school year is in progress in the Start Date field, the current date displays.
You may click
to select a different date, if desired.
5. In the End Date field, the calendar’s end date displays.
You may click
20
to select a different date, if desired.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Initial District Setup
Note: If you are using the Rotating cycle type, the first cycle day in the set of cycle
days for the instructional cycle associated with this calendar displays in the
Starting Cycle Day list. You may select a different cycle day, if desired.
6. Click Assign Instructional Cycle Days.
The adjusted cycle days display on the calendar.
Instructional Cycles on a School Calendar
Associate Schools with Calendars
You must associate a school calendar with the school buildings in your school district for accurate
attendance totaling. You can also associate multiple school calendars with one school building if
that is required in your school district. For example, kindergarten may follow a slightly different
calendar schedule than the other grades in the same school. If you do not select a default calendar
for the school, ProgressBook GradeBook uses the District Calendar.
1. On the Calendar List screen, select the Schools tab.
2. On the Link Schools with Calendars screen in the Default Calendar list, select the
calendar the school will use as its default calendar.
3. Select any additional calendars the school will use, if appropriate.
4. Click Save.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
21
Initial District Setup
Link Schools with Calendars Screen
Set Up Rounding Preferences for Student Averages
The Grade Book Rounding preference determines how student averages are rounded and
displayed in ProgressBook GradeBook. This sets how student averages are displayed throughout
the teacher’s grade book, such as the Class Dashboard, Grade Book Grid, Progress by Student
Grid as well as the Progress Details section of the Student tab on the ParentAccess Web Site.
The rounding preferences are determined by modifying specific records in the LookupCodes table
in the district database. You can set the student averages to display up to two decimal places.
Set Up Rounding for Grade Book
1. Open SQL Server Management Studio.
2. In the Object Explorer pane, expand the Databases node.
3. Expand the district database.
4. Expand the Tables node, and then open the LookupCodes table.
5. In the Group_DBID field, locate the record with a value of 6.
The value in the Group_DBID field is the identifying value for the record in the
LookupGroups table that defines (Grade Book) Rounding.
LookupGroups Table and Corresponding Record in the LookupCodes Table
22
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Initial District Setup
6. In the LookupCode field, enter one of the following values that represents the number of
decimal places you want to display after the decimal point:
•
2 – Displays two places after the decimal point, such as 89.67
•
1 – Rounds up to the nearest tenth, and displays two places after the decimal point,
such as 89.70
•
0 – Rounds up to the nearest ten and displays two zeroes after the decimal point,
such as 90.00
7. In the LookupCodes table, click out of the row to save the changes to the record.
8. Log in to ProgressBook GradeBook and navigate to the Grade Book Grid.
Student averages should display on the Grade Book Grid and Class Dashboard as a
percentage including the number of places after the decimal point that is represented by
the value you entered in step 6.
9. In each district database, repeat step 2 through step 8 for which you want to set up the
rounding for the grade book.
Make Student Pictures Available on Seating Chart
To ensure that student photographs are available to display on the desks of the seating charts
created in ProgressBook GradeBook, you can create a virtual directory if your ProgressBook
GradeBook Web application and picture directory are located on two different servers or you want
to use a different physical directory on the same server. You can also create a physical directory
if you are going to store the pictures on the same server and in the same Web site directory as
the ProgressBook GradeBook application.
ProgressBook GradeBook supports .jpg/.jpeg, .gif and .png image file types. The name of the
image file should be the district student identification number, for example, 89034251.jpg. If your
district is integrated with a student information system, this identification number should be the
same identification number that is exported from the student information system to ProgressBook
GradeBook.
Create New Virtual Directory
On the server at the same level where the ProgressBook GradeBook directory is located, create
a new virtual directory in IIS that maps to an existing directory that contains all the districts’ student
photographs on another server.
Create New Virtual Directory Using IIS6
1. Open Internet Information Services (IIS).
2. In the IIS Manager under Web Sites, locate ProgressBook.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
23
Initial District Setup
Locate ProgressBook in IIS6
Manager
3. Right-click on ProgressBook, select New and then select Virtual Directory.
4. In the Virtual Directory Creation Wizard, click Next.
5. On the Virtual Directory Creation Wizard in the Alias field, type the name of the directory
that will contain all the student photographs. For example, you could name the directory
Pictures, Photographs or StudentPictures.
6. In the Path field, enter the directory path that contains the district folders with the
students’ pictures.
Note: Do not select the district folders; select the level preceding the district
folders.
7. Click Next.
8. Under Allow the following permissions, check Read.
9. Click Next.
10. Click Finish.
11. If the students’ pictures are on multiple servers, repeat step 1 through step 10.
12. In IIS Manager in the left pane, select the new virtual directory, and in the right pane,
verify that the appropriate files appear.
13. Open Microsoft SQL Server 2005/2008.
14. In Microsoft SQL Server 2005/2008 in the PB_Master database, find the DistrictLogin
table.
15. Right-click on the DistrictLogin table, and select Edit Top 200 Rows.
Create New Virtual Directory Using IIS7
1. Open Internet Information Services (IIS).
2. In IIS Manager under Default Web Site, locate ProgressBook.
24
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Initial District Setup
Locate ProgressBook in IIS7
Manager
3. Right-click on ProgressBook, and select Add Virtual Directory.
4. On the Add Virtual Directory screen in the Alias field, type the name of the directory that
will contain all the student photographs. For example, you could name the directory
Pictures, Photographs or StudentPictures.
5. In the Physical path field, type the directory path that contains the district folders with the
students’ pictures.
Note: Do not select the district folders; select the level preceding the district
folders.
6. Click OK.
7. If the students’ pictures are on multiple servers, repeat step 1 through step 6.
8. In IIS Manager in the left pane, select the new virtual directory, and in the right pane,
verify that the appropriate files appear.
9. Open Microsoft SQL Server 2005/2008.
10. In Microsoft SQL Server 2005/2008 in the PB_Master database, find the DistrictLogin
table.
11. Right-click on the DistrictLogin table, and select Edit Top 200 Rows.
Create New Directory
If you want to maintain student photographs on the same server and in the same Web site
directory as your ProgressBook GradeBook application, you can simply create a new directory. If
you are maintaining student photographs for multiple school districts, it is recommended to create
a separate subdirectory for each district. In this case, for example, the directory path may be
C:\Inetpub\wwwroot\Pictures\Lakeview, where Lakeview represents the name of the district.
Continue to create as many subdirectories as there are districts.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
25
Initial District Setup
Add Directory to ProgressBook GradeBook
To indicate to ProgressBook GradeBook where to look for the pictures directory, the directory
information must be added to the DistrictLogin table in the pb_master database.
1. In SQL Server Enterprise Manager or SQL Server Management Studio, expand the
Databases directory.
2. Open the pb_master database.
3. In the Tables directory, view the contents of the DistrictLogin table.
4. In the DistrictLogin table, locate the district for which you want to add pictures in the
District_DBID column, and then in the PicFolder column, type ../ followed by the name of
the new directory you just created. For example, ../Pictures/Lakeview, where Pictures
represents the name of the directory and Lakeview represents the name of district
subdirectory.
5. If you are adding photographs for multiple districts, repeat step 4 as many times as the
number of districts for which you are adding photographs.
6. Close the DistrictLogin table.
7. Close the pb_master database.
Audit User Activity
The ProgressBook GradeBook network or server administrator can track user session information
as well as changes made to assignment marks and report card grades in ProgressBook
GradeBook. ProgressBook GradeBook audits this information in different ways. The user session
information is recorded in the Audit.UserSession table in the District database and cannot be
disabled. Assignment marks and report card grades that have been inserted, changed or deleted
are recorded in the PBAudit log, which displays in the Microsoft Event Viewer. The PBAudit log
can be enabled and disabled for individual district databases at any time.
View User Login/Logout Activity
User login and logout activity is recorded in the following fields in the Audit.UserSession table:
•
Staff_DBID
•
CreateDateTime
•
SessionId
•
EventType
•
IPAddress
•
DistrictStaffId
•
LastName
•
FirstName
•
LoginName
A logout record is recorded in the Audit.UserSession table only if a user clicks the Logout link to
log out of ProgressBook GradeBook.
26
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Initial District Setup
Install ProgressBook GradeBook Audit Logs
You must install the audit logs to enable tracking changes made to assignment marks and report
card grades in ProgressBook GradeBook. If you have already installed PBAudit log and
configured the settings during a software upgrade, see “Enable Audit Log” .
1. On the SQL Server, create a new subdirectory called Event Log in C:\Program
Files\Software Answers if you are running a 32-bit version of Windows Server or
C:\Program Files (x86)\Software Answers if you are running a 64-bit version of Windows
Server.
2. Download Event Log.zip to the new Event Log subdirectory, and extract the files.
3. To create the audit log, double-click EventLogMaintenance.exe.
4. On the Create/Validate ProgressBook Event Log window, highlight ProgressBook Event
Logs.
5. Next to the Resource File location field, click
to browse for PBMessages.dll.
6. In the Open window in the File Name list, select PBMessages.dll, and click Open.
PBMessages.dll displays in the Resource File location field.
Create/Validate ProgressBook Event Log
Window
Note: Make sure that the location where you choose to install audit log has ample
space to allow the log file to increase in size. If you leave this field blank, the
PBAudit log will be installed by default on the same system drive where the other
system event logs are located. It is recommended to move the PBAudit log to a
drive that has adequate space.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
27
Initial District Setup
7. If you are running Windows Server 2003, click
next to the PBAudit event log location
field to select a location to store the PBAudit log. If you are running Windows Server 2008,
leave the event log location blank for now. You can modify this setting later. See “Modify
Audit Log Settings in Windows Server 2008” .
8. On the Create/Validate ProgressBook Event Log window, click Create Event Log.
The message, “All Done” displays when the ProgressBook and PBAudit event logs have
been installed.
9. Close Create/Validate ProgressBook Event Log window.
10. Open the Event Viewer, and notice that the ProgressBook and PBAudit logs display in
the left pane.
ProgressBook and PBAudit logs in the Event Viewer
Note: Modifying PBAudit log settings and enabling the PBAudit log is optional.
Estimate Amount of Drive Space Required to Maintain Audit Log
Records
Before you begin to modify PBAudit log settings, you will need to determine the total number of
current ClassAssignmentMark and StudentReportMark records for all districts at your site. Use
this record count and the number of remaining grading periods to estimate the amount of drive
space needed to maintain a large number of records in the PBAudit log that may accumulate
through the end of the school year.
1. Open SQL Server Management Studio, and run the FindMarkTotals.sql script, which
is located in the Event Log subdirectory.
The script returns one record that represents the total number of current
ClassAssignmentMark and StudentReportMark records for all districts at your site.
2. With this number of current records, use the following guideline to calculate how much
drive space is needed to maintain PBAudit log:
3.5 million mark records = 1,000,000 KB of drive space
28
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Initial District Setup
Note: For example, if it is the end of the second grading period and you have
determined that your site will have 7 million mark records in your system by the
end of the school year, you may want to set the maximum log size to 2,000,000
KB if you want to maintain the log file through the end of the school year.
Modify Audit Log Settings in Windows Server 2003
If ProgressBook GradeBook is running on Windows Server 2003, modify PBAudit log settings, as
desired.
1. In the Event Viewer, right-click on PBAudit, and select Properties.
2. On the PBAudit Properties window in the Maximum log size (KB) list, select a value that
represents the maximum size the file can be.
The default value is 16,384.
3. On the PBAudit Properties window in the When maximum event log size is reached
section, select one of the following options:
•
Overwrite events as needed
•
Overwrite events older than – If you select this option, be sure to select a value in
the days list.
•
Do not overwrite events (clear log manually) – This is the recommended option.
Note: You may maintain the records in PBAudit as long as desired. There is no
minimum or maximum time requirement. However, if you set a maximum log size
limit and the log file reaches that size, no more records will be written to the log.
4. Click OK.
Windows Server 2003 PBAudit Properties
Window
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
29
Initial District Setup
Modify Audit Log Settings in Windows Server 2008
If ProgressBook GradeBook is running on Windows Server 2008, modify PBAudit log settings, as
desired.
1. In the Event Viewer, expand the Applications and Services Logs node.
2. Right-click on PBAudit, and select Properties.
3. On the Log Properties - PBAudit window, if you want to store the log file on a different drive
than the default location, C:\Program Files (x86)\Software Answers\Event Log, then type
the location in the Log path field.
4. In the Maximum log size (KB) list, select a value that represents the maximum size the file
can be.
The default value is 1,028.
5. In the When maximum event log size is reached section, select one of the following
options:
•
Overwrite events as needed (oldest events firsts)
•
Archive the log when full, do not overwrite events – This is the recommended
option. When the log file reaches the maximum file size limit, it stops writing records
in that file and creates a new log file.
•
Do not overwrite events (Clear logs manually)
Note: You may select different maximum event log size options at different sites,
as needed.
Windows Server 2008 LogProperties – PBAudit
Window
6. Click Apply, and then OK.
The Log Properties - PBAudit window closes.
7. Close the Event Viewer.
30
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Initial District Setup
Enable Audit Log
You can enable the PBAudit log for any district database at any time.
1. In the Event Log subdirectory, double-click EventLogging.sql to open the script in SQL
Server Management Studio.
2. Log in to the appropriate database.
3. Click Execute to run the script.
EventLogging Script
4. From the Event Log subdirectory to the Batch subdirectory where PBCompare is installed,
copy Create_audit_triggers.sql.
The default location is C:\Program Files\Software Answers\PBCompare if you are running
a 32-bit version of Windows Server or C:\Program Files (x86)\Software
Answers\PBCompare if you are running a 64-bit version of Windows Server.
5. Open PBCompare, and log in to the appropriate server using pbadmin as the username
and password.
6. Select the Script tab, and then in the Script to execute list, select
Create_audit_triggers.sql.
Note: Running this script enables triggers in the selected database that will log
activity against the StudentReportMark and ClassAssignmentMark tables.
7. Select the databases for which you want to enable auditing.
Note: DO NOT select the pb_dataintegration and pb_Master databases.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
31
Initial District Setup
Select the Appropriate Databases in PBCompare to Enable
Auditing
8. Click Start.
9. Verify that the status of the selected databases changes to “Done.”
10. Close PBCompare.
View Changes Made in ProgressBook GradeBook in Audit Log
You can monitor added, changed or deleted assignment marks or report card grades in
ProgressBook GradeBook in the PBAudit log.
1. Open the Event Viewer, and refresh PBAudit.
2. To open the Event Properties window, double-click on a record.
3. In the Event Properties window, click the up or down arrows to scroll through the records.
Notice that the staff, student, class and assignment identification numbers are different as
you scroll through the records.
4. Close the Event Properties window.
5. Close the Event Viewer.
32
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Initial District Setup
View Records in the Event Properties Window
Disable Audit Log
You can disable the PBAudit log for any district database at any time using either SQL Server
Management Studio or PBCompare.
1. In SQL Server Management Studio, open Disable_audit_triggers.sql.
2. Select the database for which you want to disable auditing.
3. Click Execute to run the script.
Disable Audit Log in PBCompare
To disable multiple district databases at once, perform the following procedure.
1. Open PBCompare, and log in to the appropriate server using pbadmin as the username
and password.
2. Select the Script tab, and then in the Script to execute list, select
Disable_audit_triggers.sql.
3. Select the databases for which you want to disable auditing.
4. Click Start.
5. Verify that the status of the selected databases changes to “Done.”
6. Close PBCompare.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
33
Initial District Setup
This page intentionally left blank.
34
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Grading Setup
This chapter will explain how to set up the ProgressBook GradeBook system for your district’s
reporting practices. ProgressBook GradeBook provides complete flexibility for each school district
to define their reporting periods and when report card grades can be entered by the teachers. In
addition you must define the types of marks that are used for grading and the grading scales used
by the district. Defining these options in the system will affect what teachers have access to in their
grade books.
Add Reporting Periods
At the beginning of each school year, it is necessary to set up reporting periods for all terms in
which grades will be given for each school. During initial implementation of ProgressBook
GradeBook, the reporting periods must be created, and each subsequent year the date ranges for
each reporting period must be adjusted appropriately. When setting up reporting periods, the
Gradebook Range option is used to indicate which reporting periods define an actual date range
for the grade book. When this option is selected, the reporting period will be available in teachers’
grade books and used to determine the reporting period in which an assignment should be
calculated. The system will use the due date on assignments compared with start and end dates
on the reporting periods to make this determination. Check the Gradebook Range option only for
reporting periods that define where assignments should fall, such as quarters or trimesters and
not on exam or final grade reporting periods.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under Grading Setup, click Reporting Periods.
2. On the Reporting Periods screen in the Name column, click in an empty field, and enter
the new reporting period name.
3. In the Short Name column, enter an abbreviation for the reporting period name.
For example, a short name for Quarter 1 could be Q1.
4. In the Gradebook Range? column, select the check box, if appropriate.
Note: When Gradebook Range is selected, Progress Book uses the
corresponding Term Begin and Term End dates for displaying assignments on the
Class Dashboard and calculating student averages for that reporting period.
Note: You need to perform step a through step c only if you selected the check
box in the Gradebook Range? column in step 4.
a. In the Term Begin column, enter the date that the reporting period begins.
b. In the Interim End column, enter the date that the Interim period ends.
c. In the Term End column, enter the date that the reporting period ends.
ProgressBook Gradebook System Manager Guide
35
Grading Setup
Reporting Periods Screen
5. Click Save.
6. To complete the process, in the Entry Dates column, click the Edit link to enter report card
entry dates.
Note: The All Year Long reporting period is used for report card assessments
that could be marked as completed at any time during the school year, such as
letter and sound recognition boxes for kindergarten standards-based report cards.
Enter Report Card Entry Dates
You must set up specific dates in which teachers can enter interim and report card grades for each
building in the school district. You can save time by using the copy option at the bottom of the
screen if the entry dates are the same for multiple buildings in your district.
1. On the Reporting Periods screen in the Entry Dates column, click the Edit link in the row
of the reporting period you are adding.
2. On the Report Card Entry Dates by School screen in the Entry Start Date field, enter the
appropriate date and time for the building for which you are setting up.
3. In the Entry End Date field, enter the appropriate date and time.
Note: If you do not specify a time, the system uses 12:00 AM as the beginning
and ending time.
Note: You can save time by using the copy defaults option to enter entry start and
end dates for all buildings and then modify the dates and times for individual
buildings, if necessary.
4. If your school district uses the Parent Access Web Site, in the Publish Date column, enter
the date and time that you want report card or interim grades to appear on the Parent
Access Web Site.
Note: For school districts that keep report card grade entry periods open all
school year, the current grading period that displays in the Grading Period list on
the Averages tab on the Student tab on the Parent Access Web Site is
determined by the report card publish date and not the report card entry end date.
However, if the report card publish date is blank, the report card entry end date
will be used.
5. Click Save.
36
ProgressBook Gradebook System Manager Guide
Grading Setup
Report Card Entry Dates by School Screen
Note: If teachers need additional time to enter report card data, then you can
extend the Report Card Entry End Date as needed. If the report card is using
batch integration with the student information system for report card grades, it will
be necessary to deselect the check box in the C column for that school to allow
the grades to be updated again in the student information system.
Note: For school districts that use the batch report card integration, the Export
Grades link displays. Click the link to open the Report Card Grade Export screen
to export only the interims and report cards grades entered for reporting periods in
which entry end dates have passed.
Edit Reporting Periods
Once a reporting period has been saved, you can change the text and/or dates.
1. On the Reporting Periods screen, change the reporting period name, short name and
term beginning and ending dates, as needed.
2. Click Save.
Delete Reporting Periods
Note: You cannot delete a reporting period if it is attached to a report card or a
class.
1. On the Reporting Periods screen in the Del? column, select the check box for the
reporting period you want to delete.
2. Click Save.
Export Report Card Grades on Demand for Districts that Run
Batch Integration
For school districts that integrate with certain student information systems, the Export Grades link
displays at the bottom of the Report Card Entry Dates by School screen. This option is used to
manually create the batch export file for report card grades, which is then imported into the student
information system. You can export interim and report card grades in the form of a text file (.txt)
ProgressBook Gradebook System Manager Guide
37
Grading Setup
to your student information system at any time in addition to the normally scheduled batch
integration procedure, as needed. The C column on the Report Card Entry Dates by School
screen indicates the final grade extract for each school for that reporting period. Once this check
box is selected, the corresponding grades will not be included in the grade extract files. This option
will automatically be selected after an extract file is created and the Entry End Date has passed.
If it is necessary to rerun the extract manually after the C column has been selected, you can use
the following procedure.
1. On the Administrator Home Page, click Reporting Periods.
2. On the Reporting Periods screen in the Entry Dates column, click the Edit link in the row
of the reporting period in which you want to export grades.
3. On the Report Card Entry Dates by School screen in the C column, deselect the check
box for the school whose report card grades you want to export.
4. Click Save.
5. To export report card grades for multiple reporting periods in multiple schools, in the
Reporting Period list, select the appropriate reporting period, and then repeat step 3 and
step 4.
6. Click the Export Grades link.
C Column on the Report Card Entry Dates by School Screen
7. On the Report Card Grade Export screen, click Export Grades.
38
ProgressBook Gradebook System Manager Guide
Grading Setup
Report Card Grade Export Screen
The following message displays, “Grade export complete.”
8. Click the Home link to return to the Administrator Home Page.
9. Return to the Report Card Entry Dates by School screen, and in the C column, notice
that the check box for the school whose report card grades you exported have been
automatically reselected.
The report card grades have been exported to the directory specified in the Lookup Descr
field for the record with the value of Extract Path in the LookupCode field in the
MasterLookupCodes table in the pb_master database. Only the System Administrator has
access to this database.
Set Up Cross References for Reporting Periods
If your school district is integrated with a student information system, you must associate reporting
periods to the corresponding terms and reporting periods in your student information system. It is
imperative to enter the appropriate cross reference codes correctly to ensure that the correct
grades are transferred to the student information system. Only ProgressBook GradeBook system
managers with master privileges can make these changes.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under Grading Setup, click Cross Reference.
2. On the Period Cross Reference screen in the School list, select the appropriate school.
3. In the appropriate Term/Period columns, select the appropriate term/period code for
each reporting period that has a mark to transfer to the student information system.
4. Click Save.
5. To continue associating reporting periods to the corresponding terms and reporting
periods for each school building in the district, repeat step 2 through step 4.
Note: Depending on your district’s student information system, additional rows or
multiple Term/Period columns may display on this screen.
ProgressBook Gradebook System Manager Guide
39
Grading Setup
Period Cross Reference Screen
Mark Types
Mark types must be set up to specify the information that can and should be entered in the
teacher’s grade book and on report cards. The following default mark types are automatically set
up in ProgressBook GradeBook and cannot be deleted:
•
A-F – A common, letter–based grade type used at thee secondary level and some
primary grades.
•
Checkmarks for Report Cards – Prints a check mark on elementary standards-based
report cards. Commonly used as the mark type with report card templates for letters and
sight words.
•
Comment – User can type upper case, lower case or mixed case alphanumeric text up to
2,000 characters.
•
Pass/fail – Pass or fail option as a mark.
•
Percent – Enables the user to enter percent values when entering marks for
assignments.
•
Points – Enables the user to enter numeric point values when entering marks for
assignments. Points are also used for total counts when entering lunch counts, total
periods absent, etc.
•
Yes/No – Enables the user to choose a yes or no option as a mark. If used an
assignments, it will display as a check box on the Grade Book Grid. When the user clicks
in the check box, a check mark displays meaning yes. If the check box is empty, it means
no.
The period attendance mark type, which enables period attendance to be taken on the Period
Attendance and Seating Chart screens, is automatically set up in ProgressBook GradeBook and
can be deleted if not in use. Valid attendance codes can be edited to meet the district’s needs.
In addition to the default mark types provided by ProgressBook GradeBook, you can create
custom mark types to meet district requirements or import them from certain student information
systems during the data integration process. Imported mark types include the school short name
40
ProgressBook Gradebook System Manager Guide
Grading Setup
code in the mark type name, such as LVHS_Marks or LVHS_Comments. For imported mark
types, all changes should be made in the student information system and imported into
ProgressBook GradeBook through the nightly integration process. With many student information
systems, it is required that report cards use the imported mark types; otherwise, errors will occur
when attempting to enter report card grades. Although mark types may be imported from the
student information system, there are some options that can be configured in ProgressBook
GradeBook. The GUI column allows you to specify what type of entry control is used on teachers’
screens to enter the grades for that mark type, for example, reserved for report card mark types
only, which is indicated in the name of the option.
To configure report cards to allow grades to be entered as the average percentage but also allow
letter grade overrides in the same field, set the imported mark type.
Add Mark Types
It is necessary to set up any custom mark types that your district will use in ProgressBook
GradeBook for grading, attendance or report card printing. You can make mark types available to
all staff or limit to only users with administrative privileges.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under Grading Setup, click Mark Types.
2. On the Mark Types screen in the Name column, click in an empty field, and enter the new
mark type name.
3. In the GUI column from the list, select the desired graphical user interface option.
•
Textbox – User can enter upper case, lower case or mixed case alphanumeric text
up to 50 characters. It is recommended to use five characters or less.
•
Long Textbox (RptCards Only) – Displays a text box on the Report Card Entry
screen. The user can enter alphanumeric text up to 2,000 characters, but screen size
may limit the ability to view the entire comment.
•
Numeric Textbox – User can enter numeric text in decimal format in the text box up
to 50 characters, for example, 999.99. It is recommended to use five characters or
less.
•
Numeric with Overrides (RptCards Only) – Displays a text box on the Report Card
Entry screen. The user can enter numeric text in decimal format in the text box up to
50 characters, for example, 999.99, as well as valid alphabetic codes. If the mark is a
number, it is calculated in the semester average. If the mark is a code, it is not
calculated in the semester average.
•
List box – Displays a drop-down list of available options in alphanumeric text format
from which the user must choose.
•
Comment – Displays a comment icon, which the user can select and then enter
alphanumeric upper case, lower case or mixed case text up to 2,000 characters.
•
Combined Comment (RptCards Only) – Provides the option of using either Coded
Comments or Comments. The user can choose one option or the other for each
student; however, they may not use both options for the same student.
•
Click List – Displays a box in which the user clicks repeatedly to display valid values
in alphanumeric text format. Each time the user clicks in the box an option displays. It
is recommended to use no more than three options.
ProgressBook Gradebook System Manager Guide
41
Grading Setup
•
Checkbox – Displays a check mark to indicate Yes/No or Complete/Incomplete as
the user clicks in the check box.
•
Radio Button – Allows a user to choose one option in a group of two or more options.
Note: The GUI option selected here determines how the Mark field displays
where marks are entered throughout ProgressBook GradeBook.
4. In the Uses List column, select the appropriate option to indicate whether you will provide
the list of valid marks.
•
Y – Yes
•
N – No
5. In the Admin Only column, select the appropriate option to indicate whether this mark type
should be available only on report cards and interims.
•
Y – Yes
•
N – No
6. Click Save.
The mark type displays in the Name column.
Mark Types Screen
7. If you selected Y in the Uses List column indicating that you will provide a list of valid
marks, click the View Marks link next to the mark type you just added.
a. On the Mark Lists screen in the Mark column, type in the value or letter for the first
valid mark.
b. In the Description column, enter a description of the mark that can be viewed when
entering marks for assignments and report card grades.
c. In the Points column, enter a number that denotes the value of the mark. For mark
types that do not have a numeric value, such as comment code, enter a number (in
descending order) that denotes the order in which the mark should be displayed.
42
ProgressBook Gradebook System Manager Guide
Grading Setup
d. Leave the ID column blank because it is only used for imported mark types.
e. Click Save.
f.
Repeat step a through step e to complete the list of valid marks for this mark type.
g. In the upper left corner of the Web site banner, click the Return to Mark Types link to
return to the Mark Types screen.
Mark Lists Screen
Edit Mark Types
Although you cannot delete default mark types, you can modify them to meet your district’s needs.
You may want to change previously created mark types.
1. On the Mark Types screen, edit the Name, GUI or List option, as needed.
2. Click Save.
3. To edit the list of valid marks, click the View Marks link that is in the same row as the Mark
Type that you want to edit.
4. Change the Mark, Description or Points, as needed.
Note: The marks are sorted in descending order by the number assigned in the
Points field.
5. Click Save.
The edited mark type displays in the list.
6. Click the Return to Mark Types link to return to the Mark Types screen.
ProgressBook Gradebook System Manager Guide
43
Grading Setup
Delete Mark Types
Mark types that are attached to assignments cannot be deleted. Additionally, mark types denoted
by an asterisk (*) have been imported into ProgressBook GradeBook from the student information
system and cannot be deleted.
1. On the Mark Types screen in the Del? column, click the check box next to the mark type
you want to delete.
2. Click Save.
Del? Column on the Mark Types Screen
Grading Scales
The ProgressBook GradeBook system manager or curriculum director must set up the grading
scales used in your school district. A default grading scale is set up in ProgressBook GradeBook,
but you can add as many grading scales as desired and then customize them to meet district
standards. It is recommended to be descriptive as possible when creating the grading scale name
and description, since teachers can view them on the Grading Scales Setup screen. Grading
scales allow teachers to:
•
Select the desired grading scale to use.
•
Use different grading scales for different classes.
•
Use different grading scales within a class, for example, assign different scales to
different students.
•
Maintain averages for multiple assessments for an individual student within a class that
follows standards-based education practices.
It is imperative to set up grading scales correctly, so the appropriate marks display when teachers
enter marks for assignments and report cards. The average calculations used in grading scales
are very complex and involve converting percentages to letter grades, letter grades to points and
points back to letter grades. When using percent and point ranges in a grading scale, make sure
to use two decimal places to prevent gaps. For example, a range ending at 89% and the next
range beginning at 90% creates a gap in a calculation of 89.65%. To eliminate this gap, the range
should end at 89.99%, and the next range should begin at 90.00%.
44
ProgressBook Gradebook System Manager Guide
Grading Setup
Keep in mind the following recommendations before adding a grading scale:
•
If your district calculates averages using two decimal places, then percent ranges and
point ranges must also use two decimal places. If ProgressBook GradeBook is set up to
round to more than two decimal places, then the grading scale must include at least the
same number of decimal places.
•
Verify that percent and point ranges do not have gaps. It is possible for a student’s
average to fall within the gap, and when that happens, ProgressBook GradeBook cannot
assign the appropriate grade.
•
Verify that percent ranges do not overlap. When a student’s grade falls within the overlap,
the system cannot assign the appropriate grade.
•
Verify that percent ranges are not duplicated. When a student has duplicate grades, the
system cannot assign the appropriate grade.
•
The starting number in a percentage or point range should be lower than the ending
number in the range.
•
Verify that point ranges are accurate since these ranges are used in translating semester
and final averages to letter grades. Point ranges should use two decimal places.
Duplicate point ranges are acceptable but not advised since ProgressBook GradeBook
may assign an incorrect letter grade.
•
Point values are used in calculating averages to letter grades. For example, a point value
for an A would be 4. Duplicate point values are acceptable but not advised since
ProgressBook GradeBook may assign an incorrect letter grade.
•
Recalculate grade books whenever you make a change to a grading scale.
•
Verify that mark types and grading scales correspond.
Add Grading Scales
1. On the Administrator Home Page under Grading Setup, click Grading Scales.
2. On the Grading Scales screen in the Web site banner, click the Add a Scale link.
3. In the Name field, type the name of the grading scale.
4. In the Description field, type the description of the grading scale.
5. In the Seq# column and the first row with an asterisk (*), type 1, which denotes the first
grading scale range entered.
6. In the Mark column, if desired, type the letter that corresponds to the first range, for
example, A.
7. In the Point Value column, if desired, type in the value that corresponds to the first range,
for example, 4.00.
Note: Make sure to include two decimal places in percent and point ranges to
prevent gaps. It is not necessary to include 0 if it is the second number after the
decimal point. It is necessary to include the 0 before the decimal point in numbers
less than 1. See “Grading Scales” .
8. In the Percentage Range columns in the Starting% column, type the beginning of the
range and in the Ending% column the end of the range.
ProgressBook Gradebook System Manager Guide
45
Grading Setup
9. In the Point Range columns in the Starting Point column, type the beginning of the range
and in the Ending Point column the end of the range.
10. Click Save.
11. To complete all marks and ranges in the grading scale, repeat step 5 through step 10,
as needed.
Grading Scales Screen
Copy Grading Scales
You can copy an existing grading scale to save time when creating new grading scales.
1. On the Grading Scales screen in the Scale list, select the grading scale you want to copy.
2. Click Copy this scale.
The name of the grading scale displays in the Scale list and Name field with (Copy)
appended to the name.
3. Edit the grading scale name and description, as desired.
4. Make any necessary changes to the grading scale, if applicable.
5. Click Save.
Edit Grading Scales
1. On the Grading Scales screen in the Scale list, select the grading scale you want to edit.
2. Make the necessary changes.
3. Click Save.
46
ProgressBook Gradebook System Manager Guide
Grading Setup
Delete Grading Scales
You can delete a row(s) in a grading scale or delete the entire grading scale. On the Grading
Scales screen, complete one of the following procedures:
To delete a row(s):
1. In the Scale list, select the grading scale you want to modify.
2. On the Grading Scales screen in the Del? column, click in the row(s) you want to delete.
3. Click Save.
To delete an entire grading scale:
1. In the Scale list, select the grading scale you want to delete.
2. Near the bottom of the screen, click the Delete this scale link.
3. Click OK to confirm.
The Confirm Deletion window closes and returns to the Grading Scales screen.
Confirm Deletion Window for a Grading Scale on the
Grading Scales Screen
ProgressBook Gradebook System Manager Guide
47
Grading Setup
This page intentionally left blank.
48
ProgressBook Gradebook System Manager Guide
Maintain Staff Accounts
This chapter defines user roles in ProgressBook GradeBook as well as describes how to create
and maintain staff accounts. For school districts that are integrated with certain student
information systems, most staff account records are imported into ProgressBook GradeBook. For
staff accounts that are not imported, you can create them in ProgressBook GradeBook.
ProgressBook GradeBook User Roles
The following user roles are available to assign to ProgressBook GradeBook users.
•
Attendance – Access to student daily and period attendance records in the Absence
Queue, an attendance export to send records to the student information system,
attendance reports, homerooms and period/block codes.
•
Cafeteria – Access to update lunch choices and lunch count reports.
•
Clerk – Access to all attendance options that the Attendance role can access as well as
report cards: view report card and interim grades by student and the Parent Access Web
Site user account maintenance and extracts.
•
Curriculum Director – Access to lesson plans, lesson plan reports, academic standards
maintenance and grading scales.
•
Guidance – Access to student progress reports and viewing student progress on the
Parent Access Web Site.
•
Master – Access to the ProgressBook GradeBook Administrator Home Page for the
entire district with edit privileges for all aspects of ProgressBook GradeBook.
•
Principal – Access to all clerical options that the Attendance and Clerical roles can
access as well as Parent Access reports, eligibility reports and student progress reports.
This role can also view student progress on the Parent Access Web Site, as well as
teacher grade book information, including Grade Book Grid, 5 Day Planner, lesson plan
and class progress reports.
•
School Administrator – Access to the ProgressBook GradeBook Administrator Home
Page for one or more school buildings to which they are assigned with edit privileges for
codes, calendars, staff, reporting periods, courses, classes, academic standards and
possibly report cards.
•
Teacher – Access to ProgressBook GradeBook’s grade book features and Special
Services (if it is enabled) for the classes and students to which they are assigned.
•
School Support – Access to homerooms, classes, students and staff in the school
buildings to which they are assigned, as well as all Principal role functionality and limited
Parent Access Web Site administration.
The following are Parent Access roles that can also be assigned to ProgressBook GradeBook
users in addition to the previous ProgressBook GradeBook roles:
•
District Web Author – Maintains school district’s Web Site content.
•
School Web Author – Maintains school building’s Web Site content.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
49
Maintain Staff Accounts
Search for Staff
You can search for any staff member account in ProgressBook GradeBook. It is recommended to
enter as much search criteria as possible to narrow the results returned.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under Annual Setup, click Staff.
2. In the School list, select the appropriate school.
3. Perform any of the following optional steps:
•
In the Staff ID field, type the staff member’s identification number.
•
In the Last Name field, type the last name or partial last name of the staff member
for whom you are searching.
•
In the User ID field, type the staff member’s ProgressBook GradeBook user
identification number.
4. Click Go.
Staff Screen
Add Staff
For staff accounts that did not import from your student information system, it may be necessary
to add them in ProgressBook GradeBook. User names for staff accounts should be unique unless
the user must have multiple staff accounts. For example, if a teacher has classes in two school
buildings, the two staff accounts can be linked through the same user login name.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under Annual Setup, click Staff.
2. On the Staff screen in the Web site banner, click the Add Staff link.
Add Staff Link on the Staff Screen
3. On the Add Staff window in the Last Name field, enter the staff member’s last name.
4. In the First Name field, enter the staff member’s first name.
5. In the Middle Name field, enter the staff member’s middle name, if applicable.
6. In the Staff ID field, enter the staff member’s identification number.
50
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Maintain Staff Accounts
This ID should follow the district’s coding procedure from the student information system.
7. In the Primary School list, select the building where the staff member primarily works.
Note: Homeroom refers to the homeroom assigned to a teacher in the student
information system and is not an option for nonteaching staff accounts.
8. In the Login Name field, enter the staff member’s login name.
Note: You can enter a login name up to 100 characters.
Note: If you enter a login name that already exists for another staff account, the
accounts will be linked and a warning message displays.
9. In the Password field, leave the field blank unless your ProgressBook GradeBook system
uses unique passwords that are not associated with users' network login or student
information system login passwords.
Note: If you do enter a password, it must meet your district’s password
requirements, or the record cannot be completed. A warning message displays if
you use a password that does not meet your district’s password requirements.
Note: If you are using Windows Authentication, password masking displays in the
Password field even if a password has not been entered.
Warning Message on Update Staff Window
10. In the Password Expiration field, enter a date by which the password should expire, or click
to select the appropriate date.
Note: This date cannot be prior to today's date.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
51
Maintain Staff Accounts
Note: The Password Expiration field may display if your district uses
ProgressBook GradeBook Authentication, and a value other than Null has been
entered in the PasswordAge field in the DistrictLogin table.
11. In the System Role list, select the appropriate role. For a description of each role, see
“ProgressBook GradeBook User Roles” .
•
Attendance
•
Cafeteria
•
Clerk
•
Curriculum Director
•
Guidance
•
Master
•
Principal
•
School Administrator
•
Teacher
•
School Support
12. In the Parent Access Security area, select the check box for appropriate option.
•
School Web Author
•
District Web Author
Note: If it is necessary to disable the staff member’s ProgressBook GradeBook
user account, select the Account Disabled? option. The staff member’s
information is maintained in ProgressBook GradeBook; however, they cannot
access the system.
13. Click Update.
Main Tab on the Staff Window
52
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Maintain Staff Accounts
Note: For support personnel who support multiple school districts on the same
server, you can click Add to all districts near the bottom of the window to assign
the staff member with a Master role to all the school districts at once.
Note: If the staff member that has been added has a nonteaching role, then the
Schools tab displays. For a staff member with a teacher role, the Schools tab
displays only if the user is granted a Parent Access Web Author role as well.
Add to all districts Link for Update Staff Window
14. Click the Schools tab.
15. Next to the schools that the staff member should have access, select the check boxes.
Note: To select all the schools on the tab, click Select all Schools. To deselect all
the schools, click Remove all Schools.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
53
Maintain Staff Accounts
Assign Schools on the Schools tab on the
Update Staff Window
16. Click Update.
17. Close the Add Staff window.
18. Continue to add staff records, as needed.
Edit Staff
1. On the Staff screen, search for the staff member whose information you want to edit. See
“Search for Staff” .
2. In the row of that staff member, click
.
Edit Staff Icon on the Staff Screen
3. On the Update Staff window, you can perform any of the following tasks:
•
In the fields, modify the information, as needed.
•
Transfer staff member’s activity. See “Transfer Staff Activity” .
•
Delete staff members. See “Delete Staff” .
Note: If the staff member you want to delete has a master role and has been
assigned access to multiple school buildings, you can click Delete from all districts
near the bottom of the window to delete the staff member from all the school
districts at once.
54
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Maintain Staff Accounts
Links on the Update Staff Window
4. Click Update.
5. Close the Update Staff window.
Note: To view the changes, refresh the Staff screen.
Transfer Staff Activity
You can transfer classes, lesson plan banks, assignment banks, homework banks and
ProgressBook SpecialServices banks that are associated with one staff record to another staff
record. Transferring changes ownership of activities to the new staff record. Once the transfer is
complete, the activities are no longer associated with the original staff record.
To delete a staff record that has classes and associated activities, you must transfer the activities
to another staff record first before you delete them. “Warning: Delete requires transfer” displays
on the Update Staff window for a staff record if there are activities in use that must be transferred.
ProgressBook GradeBook checks staff records for the following associated activities:
•
Classes
•
Assignments
•
Assignment types
•
Homework
•
Lesson plans
•
Parent Access Web Site home pages
•
Special Services banks
•
Special Services forms
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
55
Maintain Staff Accounts
Staff member records with associated SpecialServices forms can be deleted in ProgressBook
GradeBook, and staff member records with associated SpecialServices user banks can also be
deleted without first transferring bank information. The user’s name, date and time are stored in
the SpSStudentFinalizedGroupAudit and StudentFormAudit tables even after a staff record has
been deleted.
If your school district is integrated with a student information system, it is recommended to transfer
activities in ProgressBook GradeBook before making schedule changes in the student information
system.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under Annual Setup, click Staff.
2. On the Staff screen, search for the staff member in which you want to transfer activities.
See “Search for Staff” .
3. In the row of the staff member in which you want to transfer activities, click
4. On the Update Staff window, click the
.
Transfer Activity link.
5. On the Transfer Staff Activity window in the School list, select the school where the staff
member to whom you are transferring information is located.
6. In the Staff list, select the staff member to whom you are transferring information.
In the Select activity to transfer area, the activity and the number of instances of each type
of activity that is associated with the staff member is highlighted.
7. Under the Select activity to transfer area, select the check boxes of the types of activities
to transfer.
8. Click Transfer.
The message “Transfer of staff activity complete” displays when the transfer of information
is complete.
56
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Maintain Staff Accounts
Transfer Staff Activity Window
9. Close the Transfer Staff Activity window.
10. On the Update Staff window, proceed to delete the staff member, if necessary.
Delete Staff
Before you delete a staff record, you should transfer any associated activities to another staff
record first. “Warning: Delete requires transfer” displays on the Update Staff window for a staff
record if there is information in use that must be transferred. ProgressBook GradeBook checks
staff records for the following associated information:
•
Classes
•
Assignments
•
Assignment types
•
Lesson plans
•
Homework
•
Parent Access Web Site home pages
•
Special Services banks
•
Special Services forms
Staff member records with associated SpecialServices forms can be deleted in ProgressBook
GradeBook, and staff member records with associated SpecialServices user banks can also be
deleted without first transferring bank information. The user’s name, date and time are stored in
the SpSStudentFinalizedGroupAudit and StudentFormAudit tables even after a staff record has
been deleted.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
57
Maintain Staff Accounts
1. On the Administrator Home Page under Annual Setup, click Staff.
2. On the Staff screen, search for the staff member you want to delete. See “Search for
Staff” .
3. In the row of that staff member you want to delete, click
.
4. On the Update Staff window, click the X Delete link.
If there is information such as lesson plans or assignments in use by the staff member, the
following message displays, "This staff member can not be deleted for the following
reasons: Assigned to XX classes, XX assignments in use, XX assignment types in use,
XX lesson plans in use."
5. To close the message window, click OK, and then proceed to transfer the staff activity.
6. If you do not want to transfer activity, click the X Delete link.
The message, “User has been deleted” displays.
Delete Confirmation Message on the Update Staff
Window
Note: For support personnel who support multiple school districts on the same
server, you can click Delete from all districts near the bottom of the window to
delete the staff member with a Master role from all districts at once.
Note: To view the changes, refresh the Staff screen.
58
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Maintain Staff Accounts
Help a Teacher
Users with master, school administrator and school support privileges can access any teacher’s
grade book to help them as needed. When you help a teacher in this manner, you cannot do
certain tasks for the teacher because they are associated with the login that created them. For
example, do not group classes together, edit the class list or create assignment types for the
teacher because these will be associated with your account and not the teacher’s account.
You can assist a teacher with running Report Builder reports from the Teacher Home Page and
Class Dashboard. The Run as list includes the user helping the teacher as well as the user being
helped. On the Teacher Home Page, the default option in the list is the current user. On the Class
Dashboard, the default option in the list is the primary teacher of the class. If there is no primary
teacher for the class, the first additional teacher displays in the list. Once you have selected the
teacher to help in the Run as list, the reports to which the teacher has access display in the list of
reports.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under Annual Setup, click Staff.
2. On the Staff screen, search for the teacher whom you want to help.
a. In the School list, select the appropriate school, and then click Go.
A list of all the staff members in the entire school displays if you do not enter any
information in the Staff ID, Last Name or User ID fields.
b. To narrow the search results, perform any of the following optional steps:
•
In the Staff ID field, type the teacher's identification number.
•
In the Last Name field, type the full or partial last name of the teacher for whom
you are searching.
•
In the User ID field, type the teacher’s ProgressBook GradeBook user ID.
A list of staff members displays matching the search criteria entered.
3. In the Help column, click the check box of the staff member you want to help.
Note: It is not recommended to help more than one teacher at a time. If you do,
you will be in both of the teachers’ grade books simultaneously. Make sure to exit
the current teacher’s grade book before helping another teacher. If you forget the
teacher you are helping, log out of ProgressBook GradeBook and log back in.
Help Column on the Staff Screen
4. Click Save.
5. At the top of the screen, click the Grade Book link.
The teacher’s classes display on the Teacher Home Page.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
59
Maintain Staff Accounts
Grade Book Link on the Web Site Banner
6. Proceed to help the teacher, as needed.
a. To run Report Builder reports, in the Run as list, select the teacher whom you want to
help.
The reports to which the teacher has access display in the list of reports.
b. Select the appropriate report, and then click Run.
Select a Report List on the Teacher
Home Page
7. To exit the teacher’s grade book, at the top of the screen, click the Home link.
8. On the Administrator Home Page, click Staff.
9. Search for the teacher you were helping.
10. In the Help column, deselect the check box of that staff member, so you are no longer
logged into their account.
Deselect the Help Column on the Staff Screen
11. Click Save.
60
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Maintain District
This chapter describes how to enter and maintain your district information in ProgressBook
GradeBook, so homerooms, courses, classes and scheduling are set up properly. If you are
integrated with a student information system, most scheduling is done in that system and imported
into ProgressBook GradeBook. However, there may be cases where you want to create additional
courses and classes directly in ProgressBook GradeBook. In addition, there are additional
settings within ProgressBook GradeBook that you may wish to adjust on imported classes, such
as marking study halls as nongraded classes.
Add Rooms
Rooms are used in setting up homerooms and classes.
If your school district is integrated with a student information system, rooms are imported into
ProgressBook GradeBook from that system. If changes are necessary, you should make them in
the student information system.
If your school district is not integrated with a student information system, you must set up room
lists for each school during the initial ProgressBook GradeBook setup.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under District Setup, select Rooms.
2. On the Rooms screen in the School list, select the appropriate school building.
3. In the Room column, click in an empty field, and enter the room name or number.
4. In the Description field, enter a brief description of the room.
Note: The maximum amount of characters is 50 for the Description field.
5. Click Save.
6. To continue adding rooms, repeat step 2 through step 5.
Rooms Screen
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
61
Maintain District
Delete Rooms
If your school district is integrated with a student information system, rooms are imported into
ProgressBook GradeBook from that system. Any changes to rooms should be made in the student
information system.
If your school district is not integrated with a student information system, you can make changes
to rooms, as needed.
You cannot delete a room if it is associated with a class or homeroom. You must first change the
room references in the class or homeroom before you are able to delete the room in ProgressBook
GradeBook.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under Grading Setup, click Rooms.
2. On the Rooms screen in the School list, select the appropriate school building.
3. In the Del? column, click the check box of the room you want to delete.
4. Click Save.
The room is deleted and does not display on the Rooms screen.
Note: If you try to delete a room that is being used in a class or homeroom, the
following error displays, “Errors occurred during the save.”
Set Up Homerooms
For schools that are not integrated with a student information system, you can set up homerooms
as needed and schedule the teachers and students accordingly.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under Annual Setup, click Homerooms.
2. On the HomeRooms screen in the School list, select the appropriate school building.
3. On the HomeRooms screen, click the Add Homerooms link.
Add Homerooms Link on the HomeRooms Screen
4. On the Room Search window in the Select column, click the check box(es) next to the
homeroom(s) you want to add.
5. Click Add the selected rooms.
62
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Maintain District
Room Search Window
6. Close the Room Search window.
The selected homeroom(s) display on the Homerooms screen.
Add Teachers to Homerooms
1. On the HomeRooms screen in the Add Teachers column, click the Add link for the
homeroom to which you want to add a teacher.
2. On the Staff Search window in the Last Name field, enter the full or partial last name of
the teacher for whom you are searching.
3. Click Go.
A list of teachers that matches the search criteria entered displays.
4. In the Select column, click the check box for the teacher(s) you want to add.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
63
Maintain District
.
Staff Search Window
5. Click Update.
6. Close the Staff Search window.
The teacher(s) you added displays in the Teachers column.
Note: Homerooms are used for daily attendance and lunch count purposes. They
do not display in the class list on the Teacher Home Page but can be selected
when in the Daily Attendance and Lunch Count screens.
Teacher Column on the HomeRooms Screen
Remove Teachers from Homerooms
1. On the HomeRooms screen in the Teachers column, click the Remove link for the
homeroom from which you want to remove a teacher.
2. Click OK on the Confirmation window.
The teacher is removed from the homeroom and does not display in the Teachers column.
64
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Maintain District
Add Students to Homeroom Roster
1. On the HomeRooms screen in the View Students column, click the View link for the
homeroom to which you want to add students.
2. On the Homeroom Roster screen, click the Add Students link.
3. On the Students Search screen, search for the student(s) whom you want to add to the
homeroom roster.
a. In the School list, select the appropriate school building.
b. Click Go.
A list of all the students in the entire school displays if you do not enter any
information in the Grade, HR or Last Name fields.
c. To narrow the search results, perform any of the following optional steps:
•
In the Grade list, select the appropriate grade level.
•
In the HR list, select the appropriate homeroom.
•
In the Last Name field, type the full or partial last name of the student for whom
you are searching.
A list of students that matches the search criteria entered displays.
4. In the Select column, click the check box next to the student(s) you want to add to the
homeroom roster.
Note: You can click Select All to select all the students in the list.
Student Search Window
5. Click Add the selected students to the roster.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
65
Maintain District
6. Close the Students Search screen.
The students added display on the Homeroom Roster screen.
7. On the Homeroom Roster screen in the Web site banner, click the Back to the
Homeroom List link to return to the HomeRooms screen.
Remove Students from Homeroom Roster
1. On the Homerooms screen in the View Students column, click the View link for the
homeroom from which you want to remove students.
2. On the Homeroom Roster screen in the Remove? column, click the check box for the
student(s) whom you want to remove from the homeroom roster.
Remove? Column on the Homeroom Roster Screen
3. Click Remove the selected students from the homeroom.
The students are removed from the homeroom roster and do not display on the Homeroom
Roster screen.
4. On the Homeroom Roster screen in the Web site banner, click the Back to the
Homeroom List link to return to the HomeRooms screen.
Set Required Homerooms for Daily Attendance
Attendance personnel can designate the homerooms and/or classes in which daily attendance
should be taken. This ensures that teachers only take daily or homeroom attendance in the proper
class.
1. On the Administrator Home Page, click the Principal link in the banner at the top of the
screen.
2. On the Principal Home Page under Attendance, click Set Required Homerooms For
Homeroom Attendance.
3. On the Set Up Required Homerooms screen, search for the homeroom in which daily
attendance should be taken.
a. In the School list, select the appropriate school building.
66
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Maintain District
b. Click Search.
A list of all the homerooms in the entire school displays if you do not enter any
information in the HR or Last Name fields.
c. To narrow the search results, perform any of the following optional steps:
•
In the HR field, type the full or partial name of the class.
•
In the Last Name field, type the full or partial last name of the teacher assigned
to the homeroom.
d. To designate how the list of results should be sorted, in the Sort By list, select one of
the following options:
•
Homeroom
•
Last Name
•
Period
4. All homerooms and classes are selected by default. You may want to click Deselect All
to clear all the selected classes, and then in the Select column, click the check box for the
specific class in which homeroom attendance should be taken.
Set Up Required Homerooms Screen
5. Click Save.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
67
Maintain District
Add Courses
In ProgressBook GradeBook, courses are broad subject areas for which classes are taught, such
as Language Arts or Biology. All classes are associated with a course, so you must set up courses
before you can create classes. It may be necessary to create courses and/or classes for some
teachers, even if your school district is integrated with a student information system. For example,
you may create unique classes for special education teachers with the students they are working
with in order to give the teacher access to the student progress reports and the ability to create
forms in ProgressBook SpecialServices. Also, coaches may need classes with their team
members in order to monitor academic eligibility.
Generally, if your school district is integrated with a student information system, courses are
imported into ProgressBook GradeBook from that system. If changes are necessary, you should
make them in that system. If your school district is not integrated with a student information system
or scheduling for your building is not done through your student information system, you can add
courses as needed.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under Annual Setup, click Courses.
2. On the Courses screen, click the Add a Course link.
Add a Course Link on the Courses Screen
3. On the Add a Course window in the School list, select the school building in which this
course is taught, if necessary.
4. In the District Course ID field, enter the unique identification number assigned to the
course.
Note: If your school does not integrate with a student information system, the
District Course ID is optional.
5. In the Course Name field, enter a descriptive name.
6. In the Course Short Name field, enter a shorter name for the course, if desired.
7. In the Course Abbreviation field, enter an abbreviated name, if desired.
68
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Maintain District
Add a Course Window
Note: If your school does not integrate with a student information system, the
Course Short Name and Course Abbreviation fields are optional.
8. If the course is a nongraded course, for example study hall, in the Ungraded? area, click
the check box.
9. If you do not want the course to be displayed on the Parent Access Web Site, in the
Exclude from Parent Access area, click the check box.
Note: Your school may use a course called Study Habits for report card
purposes; however, you may not want to display the course on the Parent Access
Web Site.
10. If teachers are permitted to update the class roster for these courses, in the Allow Teacher
Roster Updates area, click the check box.
Note: If you select this option, the Add Students link displays on the Class Roster
screen.
11. If you created this course within ProgressBook GradeBook and you do not want the course
deleted during rollover, select the option Retain During Rollover?.
12. In the Course Grade Level(s) area, select all check boxes for the grade levels to which
the course is assigned.
13. Click Update.
14. To continue adding courses, click the Add a New Course link, and repeat step 3 through
step 13.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
69
Maintain District
Update Courses
If your school district is integrated with a student information system, courses are imported into
ProgressBook GradeBook from that system. Any changes to courses should be made in the
student information system. If your school district is not integrated with a student information
system, you can make changes to courses as needed.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under Annual Setup, click Courses.
2. On the Courses screen, search for the course that you want to edit.
a. You must enter information in at least one of the following search fields:
•
In the School list, select the appropriate school building.
•
In the District Course ID field, type the course district identification number.
•
In the Course Name field, type the full name or partial name of the course for
which you are searching.
b. In the banner, select the check box for the Courses With No Classes option, if
desired, to limit search results to only courses that do not have associated classes.
Note: If you do not select this option, search results include both courses with and
without associated classes.
c. Click Go.
A list of courses matching the search criteria entered displays. If no search results are
returned, the message “No Matches Found” displays.
3. Next to the course you want to edit, click
.
Courses Screen
4. On the Update Course window, you can change the course name, short name,
abbreviation and grade levels.
5. You can also change any of the following options:
70
•
Ungraded – Course does not use marks or grades as in study hall or lunch.
•
Exclude from Parent Access – Prevents the course from appearing on the Parent
Access Web Site.
•
Allow Teacher Roster Updates – Provides teacher with the ability to add students to
their class roster for this course only.
•
Retain During Rollover – Prevents the course from being deleted during rollover.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Maintain District
Note: If you select the Allow Teacher Roster Updates option, the Add Students
link displays on the Class Roster screen.
6. Click Update.
7. Close the Update Course window.
Update Course Window
Allow Teachers to Update Course Roster
You can allow teachers to update course rosters individually by course.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under Annual Setup, click Courses.
2. On the Courses screen, search for the course.
a. You must enter information in at least one of the following search fields:
•
In the School list, select the appropriate school building.
•
In the District Course ID field, type the course district identification number.
•
In the Course Name field, type the full name or partial name of the course for
which you are searching.
b. To limit search results to only courses that do not have associated classes, in the
banner, select the check box for the Courses With No Classes option, if desired.
If you do not select this option, search results include both courses with and without
associated classes.
c. Click Go.
A list of courses matching the search criteria entered displays. If no search results are
returned, the message “No Matches Found” displays.
3. In the row of the course you want to allow teachers to add students to their rosters, click
.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
71
Maintain District
Edit Course Icon on the Courses Screen
4. On the Update Course window, select the check box to Allow Teacher Roster Updates?
option.
Allow Teacher Roster Updates? Option on the
Update Courses Window
5. Click Update.
6. Close the Update Course window.
Note: The Add Students link displays on the Class Roster screen for any classes
associated with this course.
Delete Courses
You can delete a course only if it does not have classes associated with it.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under Annual Setup, click Courses.
2. On the Courses screen, search for the course that you want to delete.
72
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Maintain District
a. You must enter information in at least one of the following search fields:
•
In the School list, select the appropriate school building.
•
In the District Course ID field, type the course district identification number.
•
In the Course Name field, type the full name or partial name of the course for
which you are searching.
b. To limit search results to only courses that do not have associated classes, in the
banner, select the check box for the Courses With No Classes option, if desired.
If you do not select this option, search results include both courses with and without
associated classes.
c. Click Go.
A list of courses matching the search criteria entered displays. If no search results are
returned, the message “No Matches Found” displays. If courses that do not have
associated classes are returned, check boxes do not display in the Del? column, and
a hover tip describes why the course cannot be deleted. The Save button does not
display on the screen if only courses that cannot be deleted display.
3. In the Del? column, select the check box for the course you want to delete.
4. Click Save.
5. Click Yes to confirm the deletion.
Note: To delete all the courses in the list at once, select the check box in the Del?
column header row.
Note: Deleting a course that is associated with a standards-based report card
also deletes it from the report card. The report card does not need to be
recompiled because the course was deleted.
Hover Tip in the Del? Column on the Courses Screen
Add Classes
Classes are associated with courses, so courses must be set up prior to adding classes.
If your school district is integrated with a student information system, classes are imported into
ProgressBook GradeBook from that system. If changes are necessary, you should make them in
that system. If your school district is not integrated with a student information system, you can add
classes as needed.
It may be necessary to create classes for some teachers, even if your school district is integrated
with a student information system. For example, you may create unique classes for special
education teachers with the students they are working with in order to give the teacher access to
the student progress reports and the ability to create forms in ProgressBook SpecialServices.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
73
Maintain District
Also, coaches may need classes created with their team members in order to monitor academic
eligibility.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under Annual Setup, click Classes.
2. On the Classes screen, click the Add a Class link.
Add a Class Link on the Classes Screen
3. On the Add a Class window, click the Pick a Course link.
Pick a Course Link on the Add a Class Window
4. On the Course Lookup window in the Grade Level list, select the appropriate grade level.
Course Lookup Window
5. Select the Course Name to which the class should be associated.
6. On the Add a Class window in the School list, select the appropriate school building
where the class is held.
7. In the Section field, enter a unique section number for the class, for example, the
teacher's last name.
8. In the District Class ID field, enter a unique district class identification number for the
class.
74
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Maintain District
Note: If your school district is not integrated with a student information system,
the Section and District Class ID fields are optional. A unique class ID number will
be created by the system if you do not specify one; however, the section field will
remain blank if you do not enter one.
9. Click Update.
The Staff, Rpt Periods and Roster tabs display.
10. Proceed to perform the following tasks:
•
Add staff to this class. See “Add Staff to Classes” .
•
Schedule this class. See “Update Classes” . See “Schedule Classes” .
•
Add students to this class. See “Add Students to Classes” . See “Delete Rooms” .
See “Add Students to Classes” .
Main Tab on Update Class Window
Add Staff to Classes
If your school district is integrated with a student information system, classes with teachers are
imported into ProgressBook GradeBook from that system. If changes are necessary, you should
make them in that system. Even if your school district is integrated with a student information
system, it may be necessary at times to add or modify the staff members who have access to a
class. For example, special education teachers or substitutes may need access to classes
primarily taught by another teacher. You must assign a staff member to a class, so it appears in
the teacher’s grade book.
If your school district is not integrated with a student information system, you can add staff as
needed.
1. On the Update Class window, click the Staff tab.
2. On the Staff tab at the bottom of the window, click the Add Staff Members link.
The Staff Search window displays.
3. On the Staff Search window, search for the staff member whom you want to add to the
class.
a. In the School list, select the appropriate school building.
b. In the Last Name field, type the full or partial last name of the staff member for
whom you are searching.
c. Click Go.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
75
Maintain District
A list of staff members displays that matches the search criteria entered.
4. In the Select column, click the check box of the staff member you want to add to this class.
Select the Staff Member on the Staff Search Window
Note: You can click Select All to select all the teachers in the list. Click De-Select
All to clear all the check boxes.
5. Click Update.
6. Close the Staff Search window.
7. On the Update Class window in the Role list, select one of the following options:
•
Primary – Main teacher assigned to this class.
•
Additional – Able to perform the same tasks as the primary teacher.
•
Substitute – Able to perform the same tasks as the Additional role except for creating
recurring assignments, setting up grade book access and updating the class roster.
Note: ProgressBook GradeBook grants access to the grade book for a calendar
year. You may select a different time period, as needed.
8. In the Start field, click
Start field, type the date.
to select the date to begin access to your grade book, or in the
9. In the End field, click
End field, type the date.
to select the date to begin access to your grade book, or in the
10. Click Update.
76
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Maintain District
Staff Tab on the Update Class Window
11. To add additional staff members, repeat step 2 through step 10, if necessary.
12. Proceed to perform the following tasks:
•
Schedule this class.
•
Add students to this class. See “Add Students to Classes” . See “Add Students to
Classes” . See “Add Students to Classes” .
Schedule Classes
To schedule a class, you will add the appropriate reporting periods in which the class meets and
then select the appropriate cycle days and periods/blocks. You must set up the schedule for a
class, so the teacher is able to add assignments to the grade book. Also, by selecting the days
the class meets in each reporting period, recurring assignments will only occur on valid meeting
days.
If your school district is integrated with a student information system, reporting periods are
imported into ProgressBook GradeBook from that system. If changes are necessary, you should
make them in that system. If your school district is not integrated with a student information
system, you can add reporting periods, as needed.
1. On the Update Class window, click the Rpt Periods tab.
2. On the Rprt Periods tab, click the Add Reporting Periods link.
3. On the Reporting Period Search window, click the check box next to each reporting period
in which the class is taught.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
77
Maintain District
Reporting Period Search Window
4. Click Update.
The selected reporting periods display.
Rpt Periods Tab on the Update Class Window
5. In the Meeting Times column, click the Edit link for the reporting period in which you want
to schedule the class.
6. Select or deselect the appropriate cycle day and appropriate period/block in which the
class meets.
78
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Maintain District
Select Block and Cycle Days on the Update Class Window
Note: You can click Apply these settings to all periods to apply the cycle day and
period/block combinations to all the reporting periods at once, if desired.
7. Click Save.
8. Close the Cycle Days and Period/Block window.
9. In the Room list, select the appropriate room in which this class meets for each reporting
period.
10. Click Update.
Meeting Times Column on the Rpt Periods tab on the Update
Class Window
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
79
Maintain District
11. Proceed to perform the following tasks:
•
Add staff to this class. See “Add Staff to Classes” .
•
Add students to this class.
Add Students to Classes
You must add a student to a class in order for the student to display on the class roster in a
teacher's grade book.
If your school district is integrated with a student information system, students are imported into
ProgressBook GradeBook from that system. If changes are necessary, you should make them in
that system. If your school district is not integrated with a student information system, you can add
students as needed.
1. On the Update Class window, select the Roster tab.
2. On the Roster tab, click the Add Students link.
Add Students Link on the Roster Tab on the Update Class
Window
3. On the Student Search window, search for the student you want to add.
a. In the School list, select the appropriate school building.
b. Click Go.
A list of all the students in the entire school displays if you do not enter any
information in the Grade, HR or Last Name fields.
c. To narrow the search results, perform any of the following optional steps:
•
In the Grade list, select the appropriate grade.
•
In the HR list, select the appropriate homeroom.
•
In the Last Name field, type the full or partial last name of the student for whom
you are searching.
4. In the Select column, click the check box for the student(s) you want to add.
80
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Maintain District
Note: You can click Select All to select all the students in the list. Click De-Select
All to clear all the check boxes.
5. Click Add the selected students to the roster.
Student Search Window
6. Close the Student Search window.
7. Close the Update Class window.
Update Classes
If your school district is integrated with a student information system, classes are imported into
ProgressBook GradeBook from that system. If changes are necessary, you should make them in
the student information system. If your school district is not integrated with a student information
system, you can make changes to classes, as needed.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under Annual Setup, click Classes.
2. On the Classes screen, search for the class that you want to update.
a. You must enter information in at least one of the following search fields:
•
In the School list, select the appropriate school building.
•
In the Teacher Last Name field, type the full or partial last name of the teacher
associated with the class for which you are searching.
•
In the Course field, type the full or partial name of the course with which the class
is associated.
b. To limit search results to only classes that do not have students enrolled in the
banner, Select the Classes With No Students option check box, if desired.
If you do not select this option, search results include both classes with and without
students enrolled.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
81
Maintain District
c. Click Go.
A list of classes displays matching the search criteria entered. If no search results are
returned, the message "No Matches Found" displays.
3. Next to the class you want to edit, click
.
Edit Class Icon on the Classes Screen
4. On the Update Class screen, you can perform any of the following options:
•
Update the main class information.
•
Edit the section name.
•
To delete the class, click the Delete link, and then on the Confirmation window,
click OK.
Delete Link on the Main Tab on Update Class Window
Note: If you try to delete a class that is being used by the district, the following
error displays, “The data can not be deleted at this time.”
82
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Maintain District
•
Modify staff access to the class. See “Add Staff to Classes” .
•
Change a teacher's role.
•
Change the start or end dates for access to the class.
•
To remove a staff member, in the Del? column, click the check box for the staff
member you wish to remove, and then click Update.
•
Add new staff to the class.
Role Column on the Staff Tab on the Update Class
Window
•
•
Modify class schedule.
•
Add reporting periods.
•
Change the meeting days, if necessary, to reflect the days on which the class
meets for each reporting period.
•
Assign the room in which the class meets for each reporting period.
•
Delete reporting periods.
Modify students in the class.
•
Add students to a class roster.
•
Delete students from a class roster.
5. Close the Update Class window.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
83
Maintain District
Modify Class Schedule
If your school district is integrated with a student information system, class scheduling should be
modified in that system. If your school district is not integrated with a student information system,
proceed to delete reporting periods from classes by performing the following procedure.
If reporting periods are deleted from a class in the student information system but remain in
ProgressBook GradeBook and cannot be deleted on the Update Class window, there may be
grades or other data associated with them in ProgressBook GradeBook. It may be necessary to
make the changes directly in the database tables. If you are not familiar with working with the
database tables, contact your appropriate ProgressBook GradeBook support channel for further
assistance.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under Annual Setup, click Classes.
2. On the Classes screen, search for the class for which you want to modify the schedule.
a. In the School list, select the appropriate school building.
b. Click Go.
A list of all the classes in the entire school displays if you do not enter any information
in the Teacher Last Name or Course fields.
c. To narrow the search results, perform any of the following optional steps:
•
In the Teacher Last Name field, type the teacher's full or partial last name.
•
In the Course field, type the course name.
A list of classes that matches your search criteria displays.
3. Next to the class in which you want to change the schedule, click
.
4. On the Update Class window, click the Rpt Periods tab.
5. To modify the class schedule, you can perform any of the following options:
•
Modify the class meetings times:
a. In the Meeting Times column, click the Edit link next to the cycle day period/block combination you want to modify.
b. Select or deselect the appropriate cycle day and the appropriate block in which
the class meets.
84
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Maintain District
Modify the Block and Cycle Days on the Update Class Window
Note: You can click Apply these settings to all periods to apply the cycle day and
period/block combinations to all the reporting periods at once, if desired.
c. Click Save.
d. Close the Cycle Days and Period/Block window.
•
To change the room in which the class meets in the Room list, select a different
room.
•
To remove the reporting period from the class schedule in the Del? column, click the
check box of the reporting period(s) you want to remove from the class schedule.
Room Column on the Rpt Periods Tab on the Update Class
Window
6. Click Update.
7. Close the Update Class window.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
85
Maintain District
Delete Students from Class Roster
Deleting a student from a class will remove them from the teacher's class roster. Deleting a
student from this screen will not display a red W in the teacher's class list. Also, if data exists in
the class for the student being removed, they cannot be deleted from the class roster.
If your school district is integrated with a student information system, classes are imported into
ProgressBook GradeBook from that system. Any changes to classes should be made in the
student information system. If your school district is not integrated with a student information
system, you can make changes to classes, as needed.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under Annual Setup, click Classes.
2. On the Classes screen, search for the class that includes the student you want to remove.
a. You must enter information in at least one of the following search fields:
•
In the School list, select the appropriate school building.
•
In the Teacher Last Name field, type the teacher’s full or partial last name of the
teacher associated with the class for which you are searching.
•
In the Course field, type the full or partial course name with which the class is
associated.
b. Click Go.
3. Next to the class that includes the student you want to remove, click
.
4. On the Update Class window, click the Roster tab.
5. In the Del? column, click the check box next to the student(s) you want to remove.
Del? Column on the Roster Tab on the Update Class Window
86
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Maintain District
6. Click the Delete the selected students from the roster link.
The student(s) are deleted and no longer display on the Roster tab.
Note: To quickly remove all students in the class, click Select All, and then click
the Delete the selected students from the roster link to remove the selected
students from the roster.
Delete Classes
You can delete a class only if there is no grade book activity, such as assignments and lesson
plans, etc., associated with it.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under Grading Setup, click Classes.
2. On the Classes screen, search for the class that you want to delete.
a. You must enter information in at least one of the following search fields:
•
In the School list, select the appropriate school building.
•
In the Teacher Last Name field, type the full or partial name of the teacher
associated with the class for which you are searching.
•
In the Course field, type the full or partial course name with which the class is
associated.
b. To limit search results to only classes that do not have students enrolled, select
check box for the Classes With No Students option in the banner, if desired.
If you do not select this option, search results include both classes with and without
students enrolled.
c. Click Go.
A list of classes displays matching the search criteria entered. If no search results are
returned, the message “No Matches Found” displays. If classes that do not have
grade book activity are returned, check boxes do not display in the Del? column, and
a hover tip describes why the class cannot be deleted. The Save button does not
display on the screen if only classes that cannot be deleted display.
3. In the Del? column, select the check box for the class you want to delete.
4. Click Save.
5. To confirm the deletion, click Yes.
Note: To delete all the classes in the list at once, select the check box in the Del?
column header row.
Hover Tip in the Del? Column on the Classes Screen
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
87
Maintain District
Update Lunch Choices
Lunch choices are general categories that do not change through the year. These categories may
vary by building, depending on what counts are required to be reported. Lunch choices can be
updated by each building by users with Principal or Clerical roles.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under District Setup, click Lunches.
2. On the Lunch Choices screen in the School list, select the appropriate school building.
3. You can perform any of the following options:
•
To add a new lunch item, in the Lunch Choice column, type the name of the item on
the next available row.
•
To edit an existing lunch item, change the lunch item, as needed.
•
To delete an existing lunch item, in the Del? column, click the check box next to the
item.
4. Click Save.
Note: You cannot delete a lunch choice that has a lunch count associated with it.
Lunch Choices Screen
Maintain Period/Block Codes
Period/Block codes represent the periods or blocks that make up a school day and are used in
period attendance and student scheduling. School districts integrated with a student information
system must enter this information. You can modify period/block information, as needed.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under the Named Codes section, click Period/Block
Codes.
2. On the Period/Block Codes screen in the Name list, select the appropriate named codes.
3. You can perform any of the following options:
88
•
Add codes to the list.
•
To delete codes from the list, in the Del column, click the check box next to the code
(s) you want to remove from the list, and then click Save.
•
Copy the list to a new list.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Maintain District
Note: The class that displays on the Period Attendance screen when it is
accessed from the Teacher Home Page is the class that is meeting based on the
current time of day and appropriately configured period/block code start times and
durations. If both the start times and durations are not set up, the first class listed
on the Teacher Home Page displays by default on the Period Attendance screen
when it is accessed from the Teacher Home Page.
Period/Block Codes Screen
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
89
Maintain District
This page intentionally left blank.
90
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Maintain Students
This chapter describes the setup and maintenance of student-related named codes and how
those named codes are used to set up and maintain student information in your ProgressBook
GradeBook system.
Student-Related Named Codes
ProgressBook GradeBook provides a default list of named codes for you to use that remains in
the system regardless of whether or not your school district is integrated with a student information
system. Once you have set up the lists for the following named codes, they remain in your system
from year to year:
•
Admission
•
Withdrawal
•
Student Status
•
Address Types
•
Contact Types
Depending on the student information system in which your district is integrated, the codes listed
previously may be imported into ProgressBook GradeBook from that system. If changes are
necessary, you should make them in that student information system; therefore, it is not
recommended to create customized named codes lists in ProgressBook GradeBook.
If your school district is not integrated with a student information system, you must set up the
named codes lists during the initial ProgressBook GradeBook setup. You can use the predefined
list provided by ProgressBook GradeBook or you can add a customized list to suit your needs.
Add Admission Codes
Admission codes represent the student’s location prior to entering the school district. These codes
display on the Enrollment tab on the Update Student screen.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under the Named Codes section, click Admission
Codes.
2. On the Admission Codes screen in the Name list, select the appropriate named codes
list.
3. In the Code column, type the new code.
4. In the Description column, type the code’s description.
5. Click Save.
6. To continue adding codes, perform step 3 through step 5.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
91
Maintain Students
Admission Codes Screen
Add Withdrawal Codes
Withdrawal codes represent the reasons a student withdrew from the school district and are used
in maintaining homeroom absences and attendance totaling. These codes display on the
Enrollment tab on the Update Student screen.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under the Named Codes section, click Withdrawal
Codes.
2. On the Withdrawal Codes screen in the Name list, select the appropriate named codes
list.
3. In the Code column, type the new code.
4. In the Description column, type the code’s description.
5. Click Save.
6. To continue adding codes, perform step 3 through step 5.
Withdrawal Codes Screen
92
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Maintain Students
Add Student Status Codes
Student status codes describe the state of the student in the school district and are used in
attendance totaling. These codes display on the Main tab on the Update Student screen.
If you are integrated with certain information systems, the student status codes are imported as
part of the student’s record but do not automatically populate on this screen. You must still enter
student status codes on the Student Status Codes screen. The most commonly used codes are
Active and Inactive.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under the Named Codes section, click Student Status
Codes.
2. On the Student Status Codes screen in the Name list, select the appropriate named
codes list.
3. In the Code column, type the new code.
4. In the Description column, type the code’s description.
5. In the Active column, click the check box to denote that the code reflects an active status
in the school district.
6. Click Save.
7. To continue adding codes, perform step 3 through step 6.
Student Status Codes Screen
Add Address Types Codes
Address type codes represent the person’s address with whom the student lives and are used in
student contact information.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under the Named Codes section, click Address Type
Codes.
2. On the Student Address Types screen in the Name list, select the appropriate named
codes list.
3. In the Code column, type the new code.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
93
Maintain Students
4. In the Description column, type the code’s description.
5. Click Save.
6. To continue adding codes, perform step 3 through step 5.
Student Address Types Screen
Add Contact Type Codes
Contact type codes represent the type of contacts available for a student and are used in student
contact information for attendance purposes.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under the Named Codes section, click Contact Types.
2. On the Contact Types Codes screen in the Name list, select the appropriate named codes
list.
3. In the Code column, type the new code.
4. In the Description column, type the code’s description.
5. Click Save.
6. To continue adding codes, perform step 3 through step 5.
94
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Maintain Students
Contact Type Codes Screen
Copy Named Codes to New List
You can copy most default named codes lists to create a new list and make modifications to the
new list, as needed.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under the Named Codes section, select the appropriate
named code.
2. On the Named Code screen in the Name list, select the default named codes list.
3. In the Copy to new list field, type the name of the copied list.
4. Click Go.
The name entered in the Copy to new list field displays in the Name list.
5. Click Save.
Modify Named Codes
You should only modify the named codes in ProgressBook GradeBook if your school district is not
integrated with a student information system. Depending on the student information system in
which your school district may be integrated, the named codes may be imported into
ProgressBook GradeBook from that system. You should make any necessary changes to named
codes in the student information system.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under the Named Codes section, select the appropriate
named code.
2. On the Named Code screen in the Name list, select the appropriate named codes list.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
95
Maintain Students
3. Change the information, as needed.
4. Click Save.
Delete Individual Named Codes from List
You should only delete individual codes from a named codes list in ProgressBook GradeBook if
your school district is not integrated with a student information system. Depending on the student
information system in which your school district may be integrated, the named codes may be
imported into ProgressBook GradeBook from that system. You should make any necessary
changes to named codes in the student information system.
1. On the Administrator Home Page, select the appropriate named code under the Named
Codes section.
2. On the Named Code screen in the Name list, select the appropriate named codes list.
3. In the Delete column, click the check box next to the code(s) you want to remove from the
list.
4. Click Save.
Add Students
You must add students to ProgressBook GradeBook if your school district is not integrated with a
student information system. If your school district is integrated with a student information system,
students are imported into ProgressBook GradeBook from that system. If changes are necessary,
you should make them in that system.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under Annual Setup, click Students.
2. On the Students screen, click the Add a Student link.
Add a Student Link on the Students Screen
3. On the Add a Student window in the Last Name field, enter the student’s last name.
4. In the First Name field, enter the student’s first name.
5. In the Middle Name field, enter the student’s middle name.
6. In the Student ID field, enter the student’s unique identification number using your district’s
student ID protocol.
7. From the Student Sex list, select the student’s gender.
8. In the DOB field, enter the student’s date of birth using the format mm/dd/yyyy.
9. From the School list, select the student’s school.
10. From the Homeroom list, select the student’s homeroom, if applicable.
96
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Maintain Students
11. From the Student Grade list, select the student’s grade level.
12. In the Graduation Date field, enter the student’s graduation date using the format mm/dd/
yyyy.
13. From the Student Calendar list, select the student’s school calendar.
The school calendar should already be set up. See “Create School Calendars” .
14. In the Enrollment Status field, enter the student’s enrollment status.
Note: The Enrollment Status field accepts your district’s valid codes located on
the Student Status Codes screen.
15. In the Enrollment Date field, enter the student’s enrollment date in the school using the
format mm/dd/yyyy.
Add a Student Window
16. Click Update.
The Addresses, Enrollment, Contacts and Schedule tabs display.
17. Proceed to perform the following tasks:
•
Add address information. See “Add Addresses to Students” .
•
Add enrollment entry information. See “Add Enrollment Entry to Students” .
Note: The Contact tab displays contact information imported from the district’s
student information system. If your district is not integrated with a student
information system, this screen will display, “No Contacts Found.”
•
The Schedule tab displays the classes in which the student is scheduled. To add
schedule information, see “Update Classes” .
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
97
Maintain Students
Add Contacts to Students
If your school district is integrated with a student information system, students and contact
information is imported into ProgressBook GradeBook from that system. Any changes to students
or contacts should be made in the student information system.
If your school district is not integrated with a student information system, adding contact
information to students is not possible at this time.
Add Addresses to Students
If your school district is integrated with a student information system, students are imported into
ProgressBook GradeBook from that system. Any changes to students should be made in the
student information system. If your school district is not integrated with a student information
system, you can make changes to students, as needed.
1. On the Update a Student window, click the Addresses tab.
2. On the Student Addresses window, click the Add Address link.
Add Address Link on Student Addresses Window
3. In the Address Type list, select the appropriate address type.
4. In the Full Name field, type the person’s name whose address type is being entered.
5. In the Address Line 1, Address Line 2, Address Line 3, Apt. No., City, State and Zip fields,
enter the appropriate street or mailing address information.
6. In the Phone Number field, enter the appropriate phone number.
7. If the student resides at this address, in Student Residence field, click the check box.
8. If the student’s report card should be sent to this address in the Send Report Card field,
click the check box.
98
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Maintain Students
Addresses Tab on the Student Addresses Window
9. Click Save.
10. To add additional addresses for this student, in the Name/Phone column, click the Add
Address link, and repeat step 3 through step 9.
11. Proceed to perform the following tasks:
•
Add enrollment entry information. See “Add Enrollment Entry to Students” .
•
Add schedule information. See “Update Classes” .
Add Enrollment Entry to Students
If your school district is integrated with a student information system, students are imported into
ProgressBook GradeBook from that system. Any changes to students should be made in the
student information system. If your school district is not integrated with a student information
system, you can make changes to students, as needed.
1. On the Update a Student screen, click the Enrollment tab.
2. On the Student Enrollment window in the Date column, click the Add Enrollment Entry
link.
Add Enrollment Entry Link on Student Enrollment
Window
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
99
Maintain Students
3. Next to the Admission Date field, click
enrolled, or in the field, type the date.
to select the appropriate date the student was
4. From the Admission Code list, select the appropriate admission code.
5. From the Admission School list, select the appropriate school.
6. From the Admission Grade list, select the appropriate grade.
7. In the Withdraw Date field, click
appropriate.
to select the date, or in the field, type the date, if
8. From the Withdrawal Code list, select the appropriate withdrawal code, if appropriate.
9. From the Withdrawal School list, select the appropriate school.
10. From the Withdrawal Grade list, select the appropriate grade.
11. Click Save.
Enrollment Tab on the Student Enrollment Window
12. Close the Student Enrollment window.
Update Students
It may be necessary to update student information such as addresses, schedules or enrollment
status. If your school district is integrated with a student information system, students are imported
into ProgressBook GradeBook from that system. If changes are necessary, you should make
them in the student information system. If your school district is not integrated with a student
information system, you can make changes to students, as needed.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under Annual Setup, click Students.
2. On the Students screen, search for the student that you want to edit.
a. In the School list, select the appropriate school building.
b.
Click Go.
A list of all the students in the entire school displays if you do not enter any
information in the Gr, HR, Last Name or ID fields.
100
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Maintain Students
c.
To narrow the search results, perform any of the following optional steps:
•
In the Gr list, select the student’s grade level.
•
In the HR list, select the student’s homeroom.
•
In the Last Name field, type the student’s last name.
•
In the ID field, type the student’s ID.
3. Next to the student you want to edit, click
.
Search Student Records on the Students Screen
4. On the Update a Student screen on the Main tab, change the student’s information, as
needed.
5. Click Update.
6.
Proceed to perform any of the following optional tasks:
•
Add or change address information. See “Add Addresses to Students” .
•
Add or change enrollment information. See “Add Enrollment Entry to Students” .
Update a Student Window
Note: To change the student’s schedule, you must edit the class roster. See
“Update Classes” .
7. Close the Update a Student window.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
101
Maintain Students
This page intentionally left blank.
102
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Attendance Setup
This chapter describes the importance of proper setup of attendance-related areas in your
ProgressBook GradeBook system for successful attendance totaling and the impact these areas
have on the appropriate display of attendance totals on report cards.
To ensure that ProgressBook GradeBook automatically calculates attendance totals correctly and
displays them appropriately on report cards and interims, it is imperative to properly set up the
following named codes and report card assessments in your ProgressBook GradeBook system at
the start of the school year:
•
Absence Types Codes
•
Absence Totals Codes
•
Attendance Days Codes
•
School Calendars
•
Attendance Assessments on Report Cards
If your district is integrated with a student information system, it is necessary to complete these
tasks at the beginning of the school year to enable attendance to be exported to the student
information system to allow for proper attendance calculation and to enable teachers to enter
attendance for report cards even if report cards are not printed from ProgressBook GradeBook.
Setting up the Absence Types and Totals codes mentioned previously is explained in detail in this
chapter. Setting up Attendance Days codes and School Calendars was covered in detail in
previous sections. See “Add Attendance Day Codes” and “Create School Calendars” .
Once you have set up the attendance-related codes required for the attendance calculations, you
must appropriately set up the attendance assessments, such as Days Absent or Times Tardy, in
the Report Card Builder in order to display the calculated attendance totals on the report cards, if
you want to print primary report cards from ProgressBook GradeBook. These procedures are
described in detail later in this chapter. See “Add Attendance Assessments to Report Cards” .
Attendance-Related Named Codes
ProgressBook GradeBook provides a default list of named codes for you to use that remains in
the system regardless of whether or not your school district is integrated with a student information
system. Once you have set up the lists for the following named codes, they remain in your system
from year to year.
•
Absence Types
•
Absence Totals Calculations
•
Absence Reason
•
Attendance Day
•
Attendance Note
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
103
Attendance Setup
Depending on the student information system in which your district is integrated, some of the
codes listed previously may be imported into ProgressBook GradeBook from that system. If
changes are necessary, you should make them in that student information system. Therefore, it
is not recommended to create customized named codes lists in ProgressBook GradeBook.
If your school district is not integrated with a student information system, you must set up the
named codes lists during the initial ProgressBook GradeBook setup. You can use the predefined
list provided by ProgressBook GradeBook, or you can add a customized list to suit your needs.
Add Absence Types Codes
Absence type named codes represent the types of absences used in available attendance totaling
calculations. These codes must be set up before designating Absence Totals codes to ensure that
attendance totals calculate properly for report cards and interims.
You can choose to make some absence types codes available only to attendance staff and others
available to teachers. Absence types codes must be active in your system to enable teachers to
take daily and period attendance. Of the absence types codes you make available to teachers,
you must designate at least one code as active, so the codes are available for use on the Daily
Attendance and Period Attendance screens. The absence type codes designated as Admin Only
can only be entered by attendance staff, and if they are entered, they will display only on the
Period Attendance and Seating Chart screens and the Grade Book Grid. Teachers cannot enter
or overwrite Admin Only codes.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under the Named Codes section, click Absence Types.
2. On the Absence Types screen in the Name list, select the appropriate named codes list.
3. In the Code column, type the new code.
Note: Do not enter any characters except letters and numbers in the Code
column. Using special characters on this screen results in an error.
4. In the Description column, type the description of the code.
5. In the Value list, select the value that represents the code.
Note: The value is the number, such as 1 for a full day or 0.5 for a half day, used
in calculating attendance totals.
6. In the Type column, select one of the following attendance options:
•
HR – Homeroom attendance
•
PE – Period attendance
7. In the Active column, click the check box to denote that the code is active in the school
district.
8. Click Save.
104
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Attendance Setup
Absence Types Codes on the Absence Types Screen
9. To continue adding codes to the list, perform step 3 through step 8.
10. You can perform any of the following optional steps:
•
To denote that the code represents an excused absence, in the Excused column,
click the check box, if appropriate.
•
To make that code available only to ProgressBook GradeBook users with attendance,
administrator or master privileges, in the Admin Only column, click the check box.
Note: To make codes available to teachers when they take homeroom and period
attendance, do not select the check box in the Admin Only column.
•
To delete the code if it is not being used, in the Delete column, click the check box.
The scenario may occur where an absence type code may be duplicated in a named
codes list used in another school. If the code is not being used, it can be deleted.
Add Absence Totals Codes
Absence totals named codes are used to instruct ProgressBook GradeBook which calculations to
use in attendance totaling. These calculations in turn use the absence types named codes
previously defined. You must set up the Absence types named codes before the absence totals
codes. The absence types codes used in the absence totals attendance calculations are used to
display the total number of absences on the Report Card Entry screen when attendance is
automatically calculated.
If the Absences Types and Absence Totals named codes lists selected on the School Named
Codes screen do not match, the following message displays at the bottom of the screen, “The
Absence Types defined in the Absence Totals used for attendance totaling do not match the
selected Absence Types. This may cause incorrect attendance totaling. Check the following
Absence Totals calculation(s): lists the affected Absence Types.”
1. On the Administrator Home Page under the Named Codes section, click Absence Totals.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
105
Attendance Setup
2. On the Absence Totals screen in the Name list, select the appropriate named codes list.
3. In the Use? column, click the check box next to the Available Calculations you want to
use in attendance totaling.
Note: If you want to include Days Present in absence totaling on report cards and
interims, you must also select Days Possible.
Note: The absence types codes in the Available Calculations column designated
by an asterisk (*) display on the Report Card Entry screen in the Assessment
column when attendance is automatically calculated.
4. Click Save.
The Edit link displays in the Included Codes column.
Note: You can select multiple available calculations and then click Save.
5. In the Included Codes column, click the Edit link for the available calculation you want to
edit.
A window displays.
6. In the Choose a Code List option, select the appropriate named codes list.
7. In the Check the Attendance Codes to use in the Calculation option, select the check
box(es) next to the absence type codes to use.
Times Tardy Window
8. Click Save.
106
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Attendance Setup
Note: To ensure that the attendance calculations are correct for each building,
make sure you are working with the code list that is associated with the school
being set up. See “Associate Named Codes Lists with Schools” .
The absence type codes selected display in the Included Codes column on the Absence
Totals screen.
9. To continue selecting calculations used in attendance totaling, repeat step 3 through
step 8.
Add Absence Reason Codes
Absence reason codes represent the reasons for student absences. These codes display on the
Absence Queue, Attendance by Student List and Update Absence Info screens for attendance
staff to reconcile absence records.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under the Named Codes section, click Absence
Reason.
2. On the Absence Reason screen in the Name list, select the appropriate named codes list.
3. In the Code column, type the new code.
4. In the Description column, type the code’s description.
5. Click Save.
6. To continue adding codes, perform step 3 through step 5.
Absence Reason Codes on the Absence Reason Screen
Attendance Day Codes
Attendance Days codes were covered in detail in the Initial District Setup chapter when setting up
the school calendars. See “Add Attendance Day Codes” . These codes represent the types of
days that school is in session. Each day type, such as full day, half day or holiday, is assigned a
value. In addition to using the Attendance Day Codes to set up the calendars, the value of the type
of each day is used in calculating attendance totals. For example, if a student is marked absent
on a day that is designated on the school calendar as a Half Day, the attendance calculation would
use the multiplier defined on the Attendance Day Codes screen.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
107
Attendance Setup
Attendance Day Codes Screen
Add Attendance Note Codes
Attendance note codes represent the types of notes accepted for student absences and are used
for school attendance records purposes.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under the Named Codes section, click Attendance
Note.
2. On the Attendance Note screen in the Name list, select the appropriate named codes list.
3. In the Code column, type the new code.
4. In the Description column, type the code’s description.
5. Click Save.
6. To continue adding codes, perform step 3 through step 5.
Attendance Note Screen
108
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Attendance Setup
Copy Named Codes to New List
You can copy most default named codes lists to create a new list and make modifications to the
new list, as needed.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under the Named Codes section, select the appropriate
named code.
2. On the Named Code screen in the Name list, select the default named codes list.
3. In the Copy to new list field, type the name of the copied list.
4. Click Go.
The name entered in the Copy to new list field displays in the Name list.
5. Click Save.
Copy to new list Field on the Attendance Note Screen
Modify Named Codes
You should only modify the named codes in ProgressBook GradeBook if your school district is not
integrated with a student information system. Depending on the student information system in
which your school district may be integrated, the named codes may be imported into
ProgressBook GradeBook from that system. You should make any necessary changes to named
codes in the student information system.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under the Named Codes section, select the appropriate
named code.
2. On the Named Code screen in the Name list, select the appropriate named codes list.
3. Change the information, as needed.
4. Click Save.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
109
Attendance Setup
Delete Individual Named Codes from List
You should only delete individual codes from a named codes list in ProgressBook GradeBook if
your school district is not integrated with a student information system. Depending on the student
information system in which your school district may be integrated, the named codes may be
imported into ProgressBook GradeBook from that system. You should make any necessary
changes to named codes in the student information system.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under the Named Codes section, select the appropriate
named code.
2. On the Named Code screen in the Name list, select the appropriate named codes list.
3. In the Delete column, click the check box next to the code(s) you want to remove from the
list.
4. Click Save.
Note: You cannot delete the named codes lists discussed in this chapter if a code
in one of the lists has been assigned to a student. For example, if a student has
been marked Tardy, which is a code in the Absence Types named codes list, the
Absence Types named codes list cannot be deleted.
Add Attendance Assessments to Report Cards
Once you have set up all of the attendance codes and defined the calculations, the final step is to
set up the report cards. If you are creating primary report cards to print out of ProgressBook
GradeBook and want attendance totals to display on the report card, you must create an
attendance assessment for each type of attendance record that you use. These attendance
assessments must be included in one of the courses that display on the report card. You can
either create a separate course that includes only attendance assessments or you can include the
attendance assessments in an existing course. You must create the attendance assessments in
the Report Card Builder to ensure that they display appropriately on the report card whether or not
your school district is integrated with a student information system.
This procedure only provides information specific to setting up attendance assessments. For
complete details on setting up report cards in ProgressBook GradeBook, see “Report Cards and
Interims” .
1. On the Administrators Home Page under Grading Setup, select Report Card Builder.
2. On the Report Cards screen, select the report card in which you want to set up
attendance assessments.
If you are creating traditional report cards, proceed to step 4.
3. If you are creating standards-based report cards, on the Assessments tab in the Course
list, select the course name for which you want to enter attendance assessments.
4. In the Assessment column, type Days Absent or whatever text your district wishes to use
as labels on the report card for attendance.
5. In the Seq# column, type a number that represents the order in which the assessment
displays on the printed report card and Report Card Entry screen.
110
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Attendance Setup
Note: Use numbers in increments of 5 or 10, so you can add assessments later, if
needed.
6. In the Mark Type column, select the Points option.
Note: You do not have to select a default grading scale for attendance
assessments to calculate properly.
7. If you are creating standards-based report cards and you selected Use Basic Calculations
on the General tab, select Average in the Default Calculation list. See “Add Assessments
to Report Cards” for a detailed description of calculation methods.
Note: If your school district does not want ProgressBook GradeBook to
automatically calculate attendance assessments but instead wants teachers to
manually enter attendance assessments on the Report Card Entry screen, you
must select None in the Default Calculation list. This same condition applies in
traditional report cards, but you must select No in the Calc Mark? list.
8. If you are creating traditional report cards and you selected Use Basic Calculations as the
Average Calculation Method on the General tab, select Y in the Calc Mark? column. If you
selected Use Advanced Calculations on the General tab, the Calc Mark? Column does not
display.
•
Yes – The mark type selected is a calculated mark type, such as grading scales,
points and percentages.
•
No – The mark type selected is not a calculated mark type.
9. In the Value Req? Column, select one of the following options.
•
Yes – Displays teachers on the Report Card Verification Report who have not entered
marks for assessments.
•
No – Does not display teachers on the Report Card Verification Report who have not
entered marks for assessments.
External Reference Column on the Assessments T ab on the Report Card Screen
Note: If your school district is not integrated with a student information system,
the External Reference column does not display.
10. In the External Reference column, select the appropriate option(s) to instruct the student
information system of the appropriate place to put the assessment during data integration.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
111
Attendance Setup
Note: The External Reference options listed vary depending on the student
information system with which your school district is integrated. Only the options
display for which you want to export a code to the student information system.
Note: If you do not select at least one option in the External Reference column for
an assessment, a warning displays when you compile the report card if you
selected Live or Batch as the data integration method on the General tab.
11. If you are creating standards-based report cards in the Group these assessments under
Special Subjects? option, select No.
•
Yes – Group subjects such as Art, Music and Physical Education together.
•
No – Default option.
12. Click Save.
13. To continue adding attendance assessments, such as Days Present or Times Tardy,
repeat step 4 through step 12.
Associate Assessments with Reporting Periods
To make sure attendance assessment totals display in the correct reporting periods on the report
card, you must assign them to the reporting periods in which they will be calculated.
1. On the Administrators Home Page under Grading Setup, select Report Card Builder.
2. On the Report Cards screen, select the report card in which you want to associate
assessments with reporting periods.
3. On the Requirements tab, select the grading period(s) in which each assessment is
evaluated.
Note: If you do not select a grading period in which the assessment is used, the
assessment appears shaded on the Report Card Entry screen, but grades cannot
be entered for that assessment.
Note: To quickly select all the assessments in the list, click Select All.
4. Click Save.
Report Period Columns on the Requirements Tab
112
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Attendance Setup
Associate Assessments with Mapping Identifiers in Reporting
Periods
If you are printing standards-based report cards or interims from ProgressBook GradeBook, to
instruct the system on the appropriate place to put calculated attendance assessments on the
report card, you must associate the specific attendance assessment with a mapping identifier for
each reporting period. The mapping identifier is a code in the report card template that places the
assessment in the appropriate template piece on the report card.
1. On the Administrators Home Page under Grading Setup, select Report Card Builder.
2. On the Report Cards screen, select the report card in which you want to associate
assessments with mapping identifiers in reporting periods.
If you are creating traditional report cards, proceed to step 4.
3. If you are creating standards-based report cards, on the Mappings tab in the Course list,
select the appropriate course that includes the attendance assessments to be mapped.
4. In the Quarter/Reporting Period list for each attendance assessment, select the
appropriate attendance assessment mapping identifier.
For example, select #Absent1# for the Absent assessment in the Quarter 1 list, #Absent2#
in the Quarter 2 list, etc., for all the reporting periods that the assessment displays on the
report card.
Note: Mapping identifier options vary depending on the template being used.
5. Click Save.
Mappings Tab on the Report Card Screen
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
113
Attendance Setup
Update Attendance Totals During Data Integration
ProgressBook GradeBook updates attendance totals when the nightly procedure is run on the
server. The attendance calculations appear on the Report Card Entry screen during the report
card grade entry time frame. The next time that the data integration procedure runs after the report
card grade entry time frame closes, final attendance totals are calculated, and these final
attendance totals are displayed on report cards.
114
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Report Cards and Interims
This chapter describes the process of creating standards-based and traditional report cards and
interims in the Report Card Builder. Depending on the style of report card you choose when you
begin creating the report card, the availability of different tabs allow you to customize courses,
assessments, grade calculations and attendance data integration with your student information
system.
ProgressBook GradeBook provides numerous, custom-designed template pieces in various sizes
for printing report cards. However, even if you do not want to print report cards and interims from
ProgressBook GradeBook but instead print them from your student information system, you must
still create report cards in ProgressBook GradeBook.
Once you have selected all of the necessary options and previewed the report card to ensure it
meets your layout requirements, you must compile the final report card and make it active in your
system for teachers to use.ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager GuideProgressBook
GradeBook System Manager Guide
To ensure consistent grade book configurations for all teachers' grade books, if your district uses
standards-based report cards you can set up grade books to automatically apply the Grading
Scale Custom Setup 2 option.
Report Cards Screen
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
115
Report Cards and Interims
Create Report Cards/Interims
Creating report cards/interims is a multiple-step process that provides numerous options for
entering report card/interim content and formatting the printed report card/interim. It is imperative
to create report cards/interims in ProgressBook GradeBook at the beginning of the school year to
enable teachers to enter grades, to allow for proper grade calculation and attendance totaling and
to enable grades to be exported to the student information system.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under Grading Setup, click Report Card Builder.
2. On the Report Cards screen near the bottom of the screen, click the Add a Report Card
link.
The General tab is highlighted in the Web site banner.
General Tab for Creating a New Report Card
3. In the Enter a name for the report card field, type a name for the report card/interim.
Note: This name should easily identify the report card/interim and display in the
list on the Report Cards screen, Interims and Report Card Entry screens and
Parent Access Web Site.
4. In the Choose the type that will be produced option, select one of the following report card
types:
•
Report Card
•
Interim Report
Note: The formats refer to style of report card/interim, as in traditional or
standards-based, and not grade level.
116
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Report Cards and Interims
5. In the Select a format for the report option, select one of the following formats:
•
Elementary – Recommended if using different assessments in each course
(standards-based report cards/interims) and for school districts that want to print
report cards/interims. Individual courses within one grade may have different sets of
assessments.
•
Secondary – Recommended if the same assessments are used for all courses
(traditional report cards/interims). Since ProgressBook GradeBook does not calculate
cumulative grade point averages, it is recommended to print secondary report
cards/interims from your student information system. However, you must still create
report cards/interims in ProgressBook GradeBook.
6. If you are printing report cards/interims from ProgressBook GradeBook, in the Select the
template for printing list, select one of the following paper size and layout options:
•
Standard Elementary Report Card (11 * 17 landscape, 2 columns)
•
Standard Elementary Report Card (8 1/2 * 11 portrait)
•
Standard Elementary Report Card (8 1/2 * 11 landscape, 2 columns)
•
Standard Elementary Report Card (8 1/2 * 14 portrait)
•
Standard Elementary Report Card (Legal tri-fold)
7. From Which Average Calculation Method would you like to use? list, select one of the
following calculation methods:
Note: The primary difference between Basic and Advanced Calculations depends
on how grades used in system calculations are entered into ProgressBook
GradeBook. If all of the grades used are entered on the same Assessment row,
Basic Calculations can be used. If the grades used are entered on various
Assessment rows, Advanced Calculations must be used.
•
Use Basic Calculations – To determine how grades will be calculated only for the
reporting periods that are not set up as a grade book range on the Reporting Periods
screen. Often, this option is used if creating standards-based report cards/interims.
Basic Calculations is recommended for school districts that are not integrated with a
student information system and for school districts that are integrated with some
student information systems.
Report Card Entry Setup Using Basic Calculations
•
Use Advanced Calculations – To assign report card/interim grade entry methods for
all assessments and reporting periods and then set up how grades will be calculated
for those designated as system calculations. Use this option if creating traditional
report cards/interims. Advanced Calculations is recommended for school districts that
are integrated with most student information systems.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
117
Report Cards and Interims
Report Card Entry Setup Using Advanced Calculations
Once you save the report card/interim, the Web site banner will display different
calculation tabs depending on your selection of either Basic or Advanced Calculations.
These Web site banner links are system calculation steps used for defining how semester
and final grades are calculated. With Basic Calculations, Average Calcs is the only link to
complete on the Web site banner.
Basic Calculations Web Site Banner Link
However, Advanced Calc and System Calcs are the links to complete on the Web site
banner for Advanced Calculations.
Advanced Calculations Web Site Banner Links
In addition to system calculation steps, the Basic or Advanced Calculations option
determines whether certain options display on the Assessments link. With Basic
Calculations, the Pull Mark? column displays for elementary style report cards.
Pull Mark? Column on the Assessments Tab
The Calc Mark? column displays for secondary style report cards.
118
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Report Cards and Interims
Calc Mark? Column on the Assessments Tab
However, for both elementary and secondary style report cards with Advanced
Calculations, these columns are unnecessary because the Advanced Calc link designates
how grades are entered on the report card.
Advanced Calc Tab on the Report Card Screen
Note: The selection of the values for the following rounding precision options
determines the number of decimal places you want to display after the decimal
point on the report card/interim when ProgressBook GradeBook calculates
student grades using percentage averages or letter grade point equivalent
averages. The default value is 2 for each option.
8. In the Select the rounding precision to use when averaging numeric grades list, select one
of the following values that represents the number of decimal places you want to display
after the decimal point:
•
0 – Rounds up or down to the nearest whole number, such as 90.
•
1 – Rounds up or down to the nearest tenth and displays one place after the decimal
point, such as 89.7.
•
2 – Rounds up or down to the nearest hundredth and displays two places after the
decimal point, such as 89.76.
•
3 – Rounds up or down to the nearest thousandth and displays three places after the
decimal point, such as 89.765.
•
4 – Rounds up or down to the nearest ten thousandth and displays four places after
the decimal point, such as 89.7658.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
119
Report Cards and Interims
9. In the Select the rounding precision to use when averaging from letter grades list, select
one of the following values that represents the number of decimal places you want to
display after the decimal point:
•
0 – Rounds up to the nearest whole number, such as 90.
•
1 – Rounds up or down to the nearest tenth and displays one place after the decimal
point, such as 89.7.
•
2 – Rounds up or down to the nearest hundredth and displays two places after the
decimal point, such as 89.76.
•
3 – Rounds up or down to the nearest thousandth and displays three places after the
decimal point, such as 89.765.
•
4 – Rounds up or down to the nearest ten thousandth and displays four places after
the decimal point, such as 89.7658.
Note: Do not select a value to display more decimal places than the number of
decimal places defined in the ranges set up in the grading scale.
10. In the Select the report card mode options, ensure that Testing is selected.
The following modes are available at various stages of the report card/interim building
process:
•
Active – The report card/interim must be made Active after it has been compiled and
does not contain critical or severe errors. Once the report card/interim has been made
active, teachers can update report card/interim grades on the Report Card Entry
screen. Most changes made to the report card/interim while it is in Active mode and in
use causes errors.
•
Inactive – Disables the report card/interim, so it cannot be accessed by teachers.
•
Testing – Default option. Allows changes to be made to the report card/interim setup,
and allows report card/interim grades to be viewed by teachers on the Report Card
Entry screen.
Note: An error message displays if you try to make changes to the report
card/interim while it is in Active mode.You must change the mode to Inactive or
Testing before you make changes.
Note: If your school district is not integrated with a student information system,
select None in the following data integration steps.
11. In the Choose the data integration method list, select one of the following options:
120
•
Batch – Student marks are exported from ProgressBook GradeBook to the student
information system in an automated data integration process that runs after the report
card/interim grade entry time frame has passed. Marks exported from the batch data
integration process overwrite existing marks in the student information system with
the exception of those marks designated in the Protected Marks screen.
•
Live – Student marks are saved in ProgressBook GradeBook and are automatically
updated in the student information system in real time.
•
None – Recommended for school districts that are not integrated with a student
information system or create elementary style report cards/interims that do not export
marks to the student information system.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Report Cards and Interims
12. If you selected the Batch or Live data integration method in the step 11, then in the Choose
the data integration source list, select the student information system in which your
district is integrated. If you selected None in step 11, in the Choose the data integration
source list, select None.
13. In the Allow school administrators to update this report card setup option, select one of the
following access options:
•
Yes – Allows users assigned the school administrator role to update report
card/interim settings.
•
No – Allows users assigned the school administrator role to view but not update
report card/interim settings.
14. IN the Post on Parent Access option, select one of the following options:
•
Yes – Displays report card/interim data on the Parent Access Web Site.
•
No – Does not display report card/interim data on the Parent Access Web Site.
15. If you are creating interims, in the Pull grades for previous marking periods from option,
select one of the following options:
•
Report Card – Pulls report card grades for previous reporting periods when printing
the interim, which must use the same assessments and/or mark types as the interim.
•
Interim Report – Pulls interim report grades for previous reporting periods, which is
the default option.
Note: If you pull grades from report cards for the previous marking periods,
ensure that the report card uses the same assessments and/or mark types as the
interim.
16. Click Save.
The Grade Levels tab is highlighted in the Web site banner.
17. Proceed to assign grade levels to schools that use the report card/interim.
Assign Grade Levels to Schools
You must assign the appropriate grade levels to each school that uses the report card to make
the report card available to teachers when they enter grades on the Report Card Entry screen.
1. On the Grade Levels tab in the appropriate Grade Levels column, click the check box for
each grade in each school that uses the report card.
2. Click Save.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
121
Report Cards and Interims
Grade Levels Tab on the Report Card Screen
3. In the Web site banner, click Periods to proceed to define the order in which the reporting
periods display on the report card.
Assign Order to Reporting Periods
You must assign a sequence to a reporting period, so it displays in the proper order on the report
card. It is important to use the numerals 1 through 10 and not numbers in increments of five or 10
as you can on the Assessments tab. The numeral you enter in the Seq# column should represent
the number of the order in which the column displays in the template piece in the report card
template. For example, for the first quarter grade to display properly in the first column in the
Marks template piece in the template, you must enter 1 in the Seq# column next to Quarter 1. For
the second quarter grade to display properly on the report card template, you must enter 2 in the
Seq# column next to Quarter 2.
1. On the Periods tab in the Seq# column, type a number next to each reporting period that
represents the order in which the reporting period displays on the Report Card Entry
screen and printed report card.
2. Click Save.
3. If you selected Elementary report format on the General tab, in the Web site banner, click
Courses to proceed to add courses to report cards. If you selected Secondary report
format on the General tab, in the Web site banner, click Assessments to proceed to add
assessments to report cards. See “Add Assessments to Report Cards” .
Seq# Column on the Periods Tab on the Report Card Screen
122
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Report Cards and Interims
Add Courses to Report Cards
You must enter the course names to display on the report card and associate them with the
courses in which students are being evaluated. You must add courses whether or not your school
district is integrated with a student information system. The course name that displays on the
report card can be associated with multiple classes.
1. On the Courses tab in the Seq# column, type a number that represents the order in which
the course name displays on the Report Card Entry screen.
2. In the Course Name (for Rpt Card) column, type the course’s name.
Note: Course naming decisions should be made by school district administrators.
You can use a general course name like Math or Mathematics to display on the
report card that may include several Mathematics classes, such as Advanced
Mathematics and Applied Mathematics.
3. For all the courses that display on the report card, continue to enter course names and
sequence numbers.
4. Click Save.
Notice that the Add Courses link displays in the Action column next to each course name
entered.
Add Courses Link in the Action Column on the Courses Tab
5. In the Action column, click the Add Courses link next to the first course name listed.
6. On the Course Search window, search for the courses in which the student’s grades
display on the report card.
Note: The course name that displays in the Course Name field on the Course
Search window comes from course names entered in the Course Name (for Rpt
Card) column on the Courses tab.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
123
Report Cards and Interims
a. On the Course Search window, click Go.
A list of all the courses that contain the exact course name displayed in the Course
Name field for all grade levels in all the schools in the district displays.
b. To narrow the search results, perform any of the following search options:
•
In the School list, select the school for which the report card is being created.
•
In the Grade list, select the grade level in which the course is being used.
•
In the Course ID field, type the course’s identification number.
The courses that meet the search requirements you entered display.
7. In the Select column, click the check box next to each course you want to include.
Course Search Window
8. Click Add the selected courses.
The selected courses display in the Included Courses column on the Courses tab.
9. Click Save.
Included Courses Column on the Courses Tab
10. To continue adding courses, perform step 6 through step 9 for each course name that
displays on the report card.
124
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Report Cards and Interims
Note: To delete an entire course name or multiple courses included in a course
name, see “Delete Courses from Report Cards” .
Delete Courses from Report Cards
You can delete an entire course from a report card or remove individual included course(s) from
a course.
1. On the Administrator Home Page, click Report Card Builder.
2. On the Report Cards screen, select the appropriate standards-based report card.
3. Click the Courses tab.
To delete an entire course from the report card:
4. On the Courses tab in the Del column, select the check box next to the Course Name (for
Rpt Card) you want to delete.
5. Click Save.
The entire Course Name (for Rpt Card) is deleted from the report card.
To remove an included course from a report card course:
6. On the Courses tab in the Remove column, select the check box for the Included
Course(s) that you want to remove from the course.
7. Click Save.
The Course Name (for Rpt Card) is still in the report card, but the selected Included
Course(s) is no longer associated with the report card.
Remove Column on the Courses Tab on the Report Card Screen
Add Assessments to Report Cards
You must enter assessments for each course that displays on the report card, determine the mark
type and default grading scale and calculation method used. You must do this whether or not your
school district is integrated with a student information system.
If you are creating standards-based or traditional report cards and want attendance totals to
display on the report card, in one of the courses you must create an assessment for each type of
attendance record. For example, you may create Days Absent and Tardy assessments in a
course called Attendance. For attendance totals to calculate in ProgressBook GradeBook
properly if you are creating standards-based report cards, you must select Points as the Mark
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
125
Report Cards and Interims
Type for each assessment, and if you selected Use Basic Calculations on the General tab, select
any of the calculation methods except None in the Default Calculation list. For more specific
details on setting up attendance, see “Add Attendance Assessments to Report Cards” .
To quickly add assessments, you can copy assessments from existing report cards that use
similar assessments, and then modify them as needed. See “Copy Assessments” .
1. On the Assessments tab, if you are creating traditional report cards, proceed to step 2. If
you are creating standards-based report cards in the Course list, select the course name
for which you want to enter assessments.
2. In the Assessment column, type an assessment.
3. In the Seq# column, type a number that represents the order in which the assessment
displays on the printed report card and on the Report Card Entry screen. Use numbers in
increments of 5 or 10, so you can add assessments later, if needed.
4. In the Mark Type column, select the mark type.
Note: If your school district is integrated with certain student information systems,
you must use the mark type from that student information system. Mark types
should already be set up. If mark types do not display in the Mark Type list, see
“Add Mark Types” .
5. In the Default Grading Scale list, select the appropriate default grading scale.
Note: Grading scales should already be set up. If grading scales do not display in
the Default Grading Scale list, see “Add Grading Scales” .
Note: You must select a default grading scale for any mark type that is calculated
except for attendance assessments.
6. If you are creating a standards-based report card in the Default Calculation list, select one
of the following options:
•
None – Grade or mark is not calculated by the grade book. Teachers must enter the
appropriate mark manually.
•
Average – Calculates average using points or percentages for assignments in the
current grading period. If letter grades are used for assignments, the average is
calculated based on the point value associated with each letter grade. For example, if
A = 4 and B = 3, etc., these point values will be used to calculate the average.
•
Power Law – Industry-standard algorithm that applies less weight for assignment
marks given earlier in the reporting period than for assignment marks given later in
the reporting period.
This calculation method can be used with numeric as well as alphabetical mark types
and must meet the following conditions:
126
•
At least three assignments must be associated with the assessment.
•
All the assignments associated with the assessment must have the same point
value.
•
All the assignments associated with the assessment must have a weight of 1.
•
Does not include missing assignments.
•
Does not include excluded assignment marks.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Report Cards and Interims
Power Law Calculation Method
Power Law Formula (Method of
Mounting Evidence)
•
Highest Achieved – The highest mark achieved on an assignment in the current
grading period. If points are used as the mark type, ProgressBook GradeBook
translates the point value into a percentage for each assignment to determine the
highest mark. If letter grades are used as the mark type, the letter grade with the
highest point value is used. Missing assignments will not be included.
•
Last Achieved – The last mark achieved on an assignment based on the assignment
due date, not including missing assignments, in the current grading period. If points
are used as the mark type, ProgressBook GradeBook translates the last mark
achieved point value into a percentage to display as the student's grade.
•
YTD Average – Calculates average using points or percentages for assignments
from the beginning of the school year to the end of the current grading period. If letter
grades are used for assignments, the average is calculated based on the point value
associated with each letter grade. For example, if A = 4 and B = 3, etc., these point
values will be used to calculate the average.
•
YTD Power Law – Industry-standard algorithm that applies less weight for
assignment marks given earlier in the school year than for assignment marks given
through the end of the current grading period of the school year. The same conditions
must be met as for Power Law.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
127
Report Cards and Interims
•
YTD Highest Achieved – The highest mark achieved on an assignment from the
beginning of the school year to the end of the current grading period. If points are
used as the mark type, ProgressBook GradeBook translates the point value into a
percentage for each assignment to determine the highest mark. If letter grades are
used as the mark type, the letter grade with the highest point value will be used.
Missing assignments will not be included.
•
YTD Last Achieved – The last mark achieved on an assignment based on the
assignment due date, not including missing assignments, from the beginning of the
school year to the end of the current grading period. If points are used as the mark
type, ProgressBook GradeBook translates the last mark achieved point value into a
percentage to display as the student's grade.
Note: If you are creating standards-based report cards and your school district
does not want ProgressBook GradeBook to automatically calculate grades but
instead wants teachers to manually enter grades on the Report Card Entry
screen, you must select None in the Default Calculation list. This also applies for
attendance assessments. This same condition applies in traditional report cards,
but you must select No in the Calc Mark? list.
Default Calculation and Pull Mark? Columns on the Assessments Tab
7. If you are creating a standards-based report card and you previously selected Use Basic
Calculations on the General tab in the Pull Mark? list, select one of the following options.
If you previously selected Use Advanced Calculations on the General tab, the Pull Mark?
column does not display.
•
Yes – The assessment mark is automatically populated when grades are
automatically calculated on the Report Card Entry screen. This mark is based on
assignment marks entered on the Assignment Marks screen, Grade Book Grid and
Standards Based Grid.
•
No – The assessment mark is not automatically populated when grades are
automatically calculated on the Report Card Entry screen. Teachers will have to enter
assessment marks manually.
Or, if you are creating traditional report cards and you previously selected Use Basic
Calculations on the General tab in the Calc Mark? column, select one of the following
options. If you previously selected Use Advanced Calculations on the General tab, the
Calc Mark? Column does not display.
128
•
Yes – The mark type selected is a calculated mark type, such as grading scales,
points and percentages.
•
No – The mark type selected is not a calculated mark type.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Report Cards and Interims
Calc Mark? Column on the Assessments Tab
8. If you previously selected a template for printing on the General tab in the Print Mark? list,
select one of the following options:
•
Yes – Displays assessment marks on the printed report card.
•
No – Does not display assessment marks on the printed report card. However, they
do display on the Report Card Entry screen and the Report Card section of the
Student tab on the Parent Access Web Site.
Print Mark? Column on the Assessments Tab
9. In the Value Req? list, select one of the following options:
•
Yes – Displays teachers on the Report Card Verification Report who have not entered
marks for assessments.
•
No – Does not display teachers on the Report Card Verification Report who have not
entered marks for assessments.
Note: If your school district is not integrated with a student information system,
the External Reference column does not display.
10. Select the appropriate option(s) in the External Reference column to instruct the student
information system of the appropriate place to put the assessment during data integration.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
129
Report Cards and Interims
Note: The External Reference options listed vary depending on the student
information system with which your school district is integrated.
Note: If you do not select at least one option in the External Reference column for
an assessment, a warning displays when you compile the report card if you
selected Live or Batch as the data integration method on the General tab.
11. If you are creating standards-based report cards, in the Group these assessments under
Special Subjects? options, select one of the following:
•
Yes – Group subjects such as Art, Music and Physical Education together.
•
No – Default option.
12. Click Save.
13. To continue adding assessments to the same course, repeat step 2 through step 11.
14. If you are creating standards-based report cards, continue adding assessments to the
remaining courses until you have added assessments for all the courses that display on
the report card.
15. Click Requirements in the Web site banner to proceed to associate assessments with
reporting periods. See “Associate Assessments with Reporting Periods” .
Set a Default Assessment for the GradeBook Configuration Utility for
Standards-Based Report Cards
1. On the Assessments tab near the bottom of the screen, select a default assessment in the
drop-down list to be used when running the GradeBook Configuration Utility.
Note: The assessments that appear in the drop-down list are the assessments
that were selected on the Requirements tab.
2. Click Save.
130
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Report Cards and Interims
Items selected
as requirements.
Default
assessment
selected for
teacher’s
grading
scale.
Default Assessment for the GradeBook Configuration Utility
Copy Assessments
1. On the Assessments tab in the Copy the requirements from list, select the appropriate
report card to copy assessments.
2. Select the appropriate course in the next field.
3. Click Copy.
The copied assessments display on the Assessments tab.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
131
Report Cards and Interims
Copy the requirements from List on the Assessments Tab
Associate Assessments with Reporting Periods
You must designate the reporting periods in which each assessment will be used. If you want to
include attendance totals for the attendance assessments you have created, make sure to select
the reporting periods in which the attendance assessments are calculated.
You can create assessments that do not receive a mark that display only as subject headings on
the report card. Do not select a reporting period for these assessments, so they do not display on
the Grading Scale Setup, Assignment Details, Progress By Student and Standards Based Grid
screens.
1. On the Requirements tab, select the grading period in which each assessment is
evaluated.
Note: If you do not select a grading period in which the assessment is used, the
assessment displays on the Report Card Entry screen, but grades cannot be
entered for that assessment.
Note: To quickly select all the assessments in the list, click Select All.
2. Click Save.
132
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Report Cards and Interims
Reporting Period Columns on the Requirements Tab
3. In the Web site banner, click Protected Marks to proceed to prevent marks from being
overridden.
Determine Protected Marks
You can designate the marks that will not be overridden when ProgressBook GradeBook exports
report card grades to your district’s student information system. If your school district is not
integrated with a student information system, you can still select a protected marks option;
however, do not select the first option, Do Not Override Any Marks.
1. On the Protected Marks tab, select one of the following mark override options:
•
Do Not Override Any Marks – Does not override existing marks in the student
information system. Once teachers have saved report card grades, they cannot be
changed.
•
Override All Marks – Overrides all existing marks in the student information system
each time teachers save report card grades.
•
Override all Marks Except for the Following – Overrides all existing marks in the
student information system except for the marks listed. Once teachers have saved
report card grades that are listed as exceptions, they cannot be changed.
2. If you selected Override all Marks Except for the Following in step 1, in the Mark column,
enter the marks that should not be overridden.
3. Click Save.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
133
Report Cards and Interims
Protected Marks Tab
4. If you selected Use Basic Calculations on the General tab, in the Web site banner, click
the Average Calcs tab to proceed to set up average calculations methods. If you selected
Use Advanced Calculations on the General tab, in the Web site banner, click Advanced
Calc to proceed to assign the grade entry method to assessments and reporting periods.
See “Assign Grade Entry Method to Assessments and Reporting Periods” .
System Calculations
System Calculations are used to define how certain report card grades, such as semester or final
grades, should be calculated. When defining system calculations, you will be able to designate
which grades are included in the calculation, the weight of each grade used, whether the
calculation should be based on grade book averages or report card grades and also the grading
scale to be used. Each of these options can tremendously impact the outcome of the calculation,
so it is important to understand the selections made.
Set Up Average Calculation Method
If you are building standards-based or traditional report cards and on the General tab, you
selected Use Basic Calculations as the Average Calculation Method, Average Calcs displays in
the Web site banner. The reporting periods that display in the Reporting Period list are only those
that have a sequence number on the Periods tab in the Seq# column for this report card and are
not designated on the Reporting Periods screen as a Gradebook Range. In the Period column,
the options available will be the reporting periods associated with the report card. Reporting
periods set up as a gradebook range on the Reporting Periods screen will automatically calculate
from teachers’ grade books. For more details, see “Add Reporting Periods” .
1. On the Average Calcs tab in the Reporting Period list, select the appropriate option to be
calculated.
2. In the Period column, select the appropriate option.
3. In the Weight field, type a number that represents the significance of the option selected
in the Period column in relationship to the whole average.
134
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Report Cards and Interims
Note: Weights for exams and finals may be predetermined by your school
district.
4. In the Select the Calculation Method list, select one of the following calculation methods:
•
Use Averages (from Gradebook) – Uses the calculated average in the teacher’s
grade book at the time the calculation is done for reporting periods that are set up as
a grade book range (Q1, Q2, T1, MP1, etc.). For reporting period grades that are
entered manually on the Report Card Entry screen, the calculation will use the report
card grade; however, this grade must be entered in numeric average format. With this
option, the system calculation will reflect any changes made to assignment marks in
the teachers’ grade books since report card grades were entered for previous
reporting periods.
•
Use Letter Grades (from Report Card) – Uses the saved grades on the report card
for all reporting periods included in the system calculation. If grades have been saved
in letter grade format, then it uses the point value of the letter grades, and if grades
have been saved in numeric average format, it uses the numeric average. Grade
formats should be consistent to ensure accurate calculation of the grades. With this
option, the system calculation will not reflect any changes made to assignment marks
in the teachers’ grade books since report card grades were entered for previous
reporting periods.
Note: You must select the same calculation method for all options being
calculated.
Note: If you select Use Averages and an exam is set up to use a letter grade mark
type, the system will not accept the letter grade and instead will require a numeric
value. It is not recommended to set up a system calculation to include a
combination of letter grades and numeric values, such as reporting periods using
letter grades and exams as averages.
5. In the Select the Grading Scale list, select one of the following grading scale selection
methods:
•
Use the Report Card Grading Scale – Uses the grading scale selected for the
assessment on the Assessment tab.
•
Use the Grade Book Grading Scale – Uses the grading scale selected by the
teacher on the Grading Scale Setup screen.
Note: The default option is blank. When blank is selected, ProgressBook
GradeBook uses the grading scale specified by the teacher on the Grading Setup
screen, if one is specified. If a grading scale is not specified, then ProgressBook
GradeBook uses the grading scale specified on the Assessment tab.
6. Click Save.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
135
Report Cards and Interims
Reporting Period List on the Average Calcs Tab
7. To continue setting up average calculations, repeat step 2 through step 6.
Note: If you are building traditional report cards, the average calculations defined
on this screen will be available when setting up the Year to Date calculation
method.
Note: To delete a reporting period from an average calculation, click the check
box in the Del? column for the reporting period you want to delete.
Note: Any reporting period or exam grades included in the system calculation
that do not have a mark entered will not be included in final calculations. For
example, if the calculation is set up to include Q1, Q2 and SemEx with weights of
2, 2 and 1, respectively, and the teacher enters an 88.5 for Q1 and 77.25 for Q2
but enters nothing for SemEx, the calculation will be as follows: (88.5*2) +
(77.25*2) / (2+2) = 82.88%. The empty grade along with its weight value are
ignored.
Assign Grade Entry Method to Assessments and Reporting Periods
If you are building traditional or standard-based report cards and selected Use Advanced
Calculations as the Calculation Method on the General tab, Advanced Calc displays in the Web
site banner. On the Advanced Calc tab, you can designate how grades will be entered for each
assessment and reporting period used in the report card. All grades designated as System
Calculation on the Advanced Calc tab will be available in the Calculation list on the System Calcs
tab.
Depending on the student information system in which your district is integrated, performing the
following procedure may be optional or required.
136
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Report Cards and Interims
1. On the Advanced Calc tab, select one of the following methods in the list to assign marks
for each assessment in each reporting period on the report card:
•
Manual Entry – Use marks entered manually by teachers on the Report Card Entry
screen. This option can be used for class assessments, comments, reporting period
and semester exams.
•
System Calculation – Use calculations that will be set up on the System Calcs tab in
the Report Card Builder. This option can be used for semester averages, year-end
final averages, year-to-date or semester attendance totals.
•
Pull from Gradebook – Use grading period averages entered in the grade book. This
option is generally used for reporting period grades that are calculated from
assignments in the teachers’ grade books.
•
The following attendance-related options are used for attendance assessments and
use attendance totals from each reporting period defined in Absence Totals
calculations in ProgressBook GradeBook. See “Add Absence Totals Codes” .
•
Pull from DaysPoss
•
Pull from Present
•
Pull from Absent
•
Pull from UnExAbsent
•
Pull from ExAbsent
•
Pull from Tardy
•
Pull from UnExTardy
•
Pull from ExTardy
•
Pull from PerAbsent
•
Pull from PerUnExAbsent
•
Pull from PerExAbsent
•
Pull from PerTardy
•
Pull from PerUnExTardy
•
Pull from PerExTardy
Note: If you selected an attendance assessment for a report card that will be
printed from ProgressBook GradeBook, you must select the appropriate
attendance mapping identifier on the Mappings tab for each reporting period in
which the attendance assessment is used.
2. Click Save.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
137
Report Cards and Interims
Advanced Calc Tab
3. In the Web site banner, click System Calcs to proceed to set up average calculation
methods for those designated as systems calculations.
Set Up Average Calculation Method for System Calculations
If you are building traditional report cards and selected Use Advanced Calculations as the
calculation method on the General tab, System Calcs displays in the Web site banner. All grades
designated as System Calculation on the Advanced Calc tab will be available in the Calculation
list on the System Calcs tab. In the Period & Assessment column, you will be able to choose from
the list of available reporting period and grade intersects, such as Q1 Grade and EX2 Grade. You
must assign report card grade entry methods for all assessments and reporting periods and then
set up how grades will be calculated for those designated as System Calculation.
1. On the System Calcs tab in the Calculation list, select the appropriate option to be
calculated.
Note: The options that display in this list were assigned as System Calculation on
the Advanced Calc screen.
2. In the Period & Assessment column, select the appropriate option.
Note: If you selected an attendance assessment, you must select the appropriate
attendance mapping identifier on the Mappings tab for each reporting period in
which the attendance assessment is used.
3. In the Weight column, type a number that represents the significance of the option
selected in the Period & Assessment column in relationship to the whole average.
Note: Weights for exams and finals may be predetermined by your school
district.
138
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Report Cards and Interims
4. In the Select the Calculation Method list, select one of the following calculation methods:
•
Use Letter Grades (from Report Card) – Uses the saved grades on the report card
for all reporting periods included in the system calculation. If grades have been saved
in letter grade format, then it uses the point value of the letter grades, and if grades
have been saved in numeric average format, it uses the numeric average. Grade
formats should be consistent to ensure accurate calculation of the grades. With this
option, the system calculation will not reflect any changes made to assignment marks
in the teachers’ grade books since report card grades were entered for previous
reporting periods.
•
Use Averages (from Gradebook) – Uses the calculated average in the teacher’s
grade book at the time the calculation is done for reporting periods that are set up as
a grade book range (Q1, Q2, T1, MP1, etc.). For reporting period grades that are
entered manually on the Report Card Entry screen, the calculation will use the report
card grade; however, this grade must be entered in numeric average format. With this
option, the system calculation will reflect any changes made to assignment marks in
the teachers’ grade books since report card grades were entered for previous
reporting periods.
Note: You can select different calculation methods for each option being
calculated.
Note: If you select Use Averages and an exam is set up to use a letter grade mark
type, the system will not accept the letter grade and instead will require a numeric
value.
Note: System calculations can be used in defining other system calculations. For
example, the final grade for a full year class could be defined to use the Semester
1 final grade and Semester 2 final grade system calculations. If this configuration
is used, the final grade calculation must use the grades from report cards
calculation method option; otherwise, it will not calculate. (Even if all grades are
being entered on the report card as numeric averages, this calculation will not
work with the use averages from grade book method because the semester
grades are only saved on the report card.)
5. In the Select the Grading Scale list, select one of the following grading scale selection
methods:
•
Use the Report Card Grading Scale – Uses the grading scale selected for the
assessment on the Assessment tab.
•
Use the Grade Book Grading Scale – Uses the grading scale selected by the
teacher on the Grading Scale Setup screen.
Note: The default option is blank. If the blank option is used, ProgressBook
GradeBook uses the grading scale specified by the teacher on the Grading Setup
screen, if one is specified. If a grading scale is not specified, then ProgressBook
GradeBook uses the grading scale specified on the Assessment tab.
6. Click Save.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
139
Report Cards and Interims
Note: Any reporting period or exam grades included in the system calculation
that do not have a mark entered will not be included in final calculations. For
example, if the calculation is set up to include Q1, Q2 and SemEx with weights of
2, 2 and 1, respectively, and the teacher enters an 88.5 for Q1 and 77.25 for Q2
but enters nothing for SemEx, the calculation will be as follows: (88.5*2) +
(77.25*2) / (2+2) = 82.88%. The empty grade along with its weight value are
ignored.
Calculation List on the System Calcs Tab
7. To continue setting up average calculations, repeat step 2 through step 6.
Note: If you are building traditional report cards, these system calculations are
available when setting up the Year to Date calculation method.
Note: To delete a calculation method, click the check box in the Del? column for
the reporting period you want to delete.
8. If you are printing report cards, in the Web site banner, click the Template tab to proceed
to format your report card template. See “Add Messages to Report Cards” . Otherwise,
click Year to Date Calc to proceed to set up the year to date calculation method.
140
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Report Cards and Interims
Troubleshooting Tips for System Calculations
“Troubleshoot System Calculations” provides examples of system calculation issues and how to
troubleshoot each issue by checking configuration settings.
Troubleshoot System Calculations
Issue
Exam is set up to use letter grade mark type, but it will
not accept any letter grades.
Configuration Settings to Check
Verify all system calculations use Exam in the
calculation. If the calculation method on any of them is
set to Use Averages (from Gradebook), it will require the
Exam entry as numeric average.
If you use averages in the calculation, the exam must
also be entered this way, and no changes are necessary.
If you want all grades entered as letter grade format,
then the calculation method option must be changed to
Use Letter Grades (from Report Card).
Note(s):Ensure that the rounding precision for letter grades is set to 2 on
the General tab of Report Card Builder for the report card.
System calculation uses letter grades, but the calculation
is resulting in the wrong grade.
Verify rounding precision settings on the General tab of
the Report Card Builder. If the system calculation uses
letter grades, rounding precision for letter grades needs
to match number of decimals used in point ranges on the
grading scale because rounding takes place in the
calculation prior to comparing to the ranges on the
grading scale.
For example, if the grading scale point range defines that
2.76 to 3.75 translates to a B the rounding precision on
the report card for letter grades needs to be set to 2;
otherwise, a 3.54 average would round up to 4 before
being translated into the letter grade on the grading
scale.
Semester grade is set up to use a letter grade mark type,
but it will not accept any letter grades.
Verify all system calculations use the semester grade in
the calculation, such as a final grade calculation. If a
system calculation uses another system calculation, then
it must use the Use Letter Grades (from Report Card)
calculation method.
For example, if the final grade system calculation is set
up to use the semester 1 and semester 2 calculations,
the final grade calculation must be set to use grades
from the report card.
Set Up Year to Date (YTD) Calculation Method
The year to date (YTD) calculation method can be used in traditional report cards to provide an
ongoing calculation toward the students’ final grades. The calculation is based on the way you
define the final grade on the report card to calculate, including reporting period grades, exams and
respective weights. Since this calculation is based on the final grade calculation, it is not
necessarily a true year-to-date average of the assignments in the teacher’s grade book, but rather
a reflection of what the student’s final grade on the report card would be if entered at that time.
YTD calculations are not available for interims or standards-based report cards.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
141
Report Cards and Interims
Once enabled, the system will display an ongoing calculation of that final grade in the teachers’
grade books as well as on the Parent Access Web Site. Since the YTD calculation is based upon
the designated system calculation, settings in the system calculation directly affect how the grade
is calculated and the format in which it displays. For example, if the system calculation for the final
grade is configured to use letter grades from the report card, then the YTD grade will display as a
point average and letter grade.
The YTD calculation is set up in the report card after the system calculations have been defined.
This calculation can be used whether Basic Calculations or Advanced Calculations are used in
the report card, and whether the grades entered on the report cards are numeric averages or letter
grades and will use either the grade book average or the report card grade in the calculation based
on the system calculation. For example, as described in “Year to Date Calculation Scenarios” , if
the final grade system calculation uses averages from the grade book, then the YTD calculation
will also use averages from the grade book. If letter grades are used on the report card and in the
Final grade calculation, then the YTD calculation will be based on the point value equivalent for
each letter grade, and the average will display in terms of a point average.
Year to Date Calculation Scenarios
Then YTD Calculation Uses...
If Report Card Grade
Type is...
And System Calculation
Uses...
In Past Reporting
Periods
In Current Reporting
Period
Letter
Report card grades
Letter grade on report card
Letter grade for current
average in the grade book
Letter
Averages
Average in grade book
Average in grade book
Percentage
Report card grades
Percentage on report card
Average in grade book
Percentage
Averages
Average in grade book
Average in grade book
The following examples illustrate how the YTD grade would be calculated for various scenarios.
The scenarios are demonstrating how the YTD grade is calculated if today’s date is in the midst
of Q3.
Letter Grades on the Report Card and Final Grade Based on Averages from the Grade Book
Grade Book Average
(At Quarter Grade Entry)
Report Card Grade
Grade Book Average
(Today)
Q1
Q2
85.23
91.19
B
A
85.23
92.43
Ex1
82.00
Sem1
Q3
Q4
Ex2
Sem2
(Ignored since today is
in Q3)
B
YTD
Grade
87.27
B
89.43
Calculation of YTD: 85.23+92.43+82.00+89.43 = 349.09/4 = 87.27
Note: In this scenario since the grade is based on averages from the grade book,
the current average in the grade book for Q2 (92.43) is being used in the YTD
calculation.
142
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Report Cards and Interims
Letter Grades on the Report Card and Final Grade Based on Report Card Grades
A=4, B=3, C=2, D=1 and F=0
Grade Book Average
(At Quarter Grade Entry)
Report Card Grade
Grade Book Average
(Today)
Q1
Q2
85.23
91.19
B
A
85.23
92.43
Ex1
B
Sem1
Q3
Q4
Ex2
Sem2
(Ignored since today is
in Q3)
B
YTD
Grade
3.25
B
89.43
B
Calculation of YTD: 3+4+3+3 = 13/4 = 3.25
Note: In this scenario since the grade is based on report card grades, the current
average in the grade book for Q3 (89.43) is being translated into the letter grade
for the use in the YTD calculation.
Numeric Grades on Report Card and Final Grade Based on Report Card Grades
Grade Book Average
(At Quarter Grade Entry)
Report Card Grade
Grade Book Average
(Today)
Q1
Q2
85.23
91.19
85
91
85.23
92.43
Ex1
82
Sem1
Q3
Q4
Ex2
Sem2
(Ignored since today is
in Q3)
86
YTD
Grade
87
B
89.43
Calculation of YTD: 85+91+82+89 = 347/4 = 86.75
Note: In this scenario since the grade is based on report card grades, the average
saved on the report card for Q2 (91) is being used in the YTD calculation; even
though, changes have been made in the teacher’s grade book.
Note: Since this calculation can be affected in the first half of the school year, you
may choose to wait until the second half of the year to enable it. For example, if a
student gets a 95% for Q1 but misses the first assignment in Q2, the YTD
calculation is now using 95+0 (or with letter grades 4+0) in its calculation resulting
in 47.5% (or with letter grades 2.0) displaying as the YTD grade both in the
teacher’s grade book and Parent Access Web Site.
Once the YTD calculation has been enabled in the report card, grade books must be recalculated
to reflect the YTD average. Upon recalculation, the YTD average displays on the Class
Dashboard and Assignment Marks screen when users hover over student names and on the
Grade Book Grid, Report Card Entry screen and Averages section of the Student tab on the
Parent Access Web Site.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
143
Report Cards and Interims
If you are building traditional report cards, Year To Date Calc displays in the Web site banner. You
must assign calculations and possibly assessments depending on the calculation method you
selected on the General tab for which you want a cumulative year-to-date average to display in
teachers' grade books. If you selected Advanced Calculations, the calculations set up on the
System Calcs tab are available on the Year To Date Calc tab. If you selected Basic Calculations,
the reporting periods set up on the Average Calcs tab and the assessments set up on the
Assessments tab are available on the Year To Date Calc tab.
1. If you selected Advanced Calculations as the Average Calculation Method on the General
tab, on the Year To Date Calc tab in the Calculation list, select the appropriate
calculation, and then proceed to step 3.
Note: You can only select one calculation at a time to be used in the YTD
calculation method.
2. If you selected Basic Calculations as the Average Calculation Method on the General tab,
in the first list, select the appropriate calculation and, in the second list, the appropriate
assessment.
3. Next to the Enable Year to Date calculation on teacher gradebooks option, select the
check box.
4. Click Save.
The following message displays, “It is recommended that gradebooks that use this report
card be recalculated by clicking here.” See “Recalculate Grade Books” .
Clicking Here Link on the Year To Date Calc Tab
5. To proceed to compile the report card, click the Compile tab. If you are printing report
cards, in the Web site banner, click the Template tab to proceed to format your report card
template. See “Compile Report Cards” .
144
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Report Cards and Interims
Format Report Card Templates
You can create a customized template that determines how information displays on your printed
report card. If you do not choose a template size and layout option on the General tab, the
Template tab does not display in the Web site banner.
Numerous template pieces are available to be used with each template size and layout option. For
a complete list of template pieces, see “Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates” . To format
the report card as desired, you must select the appropriate template piece and assign the order
in which you want it to display on the report card.
If your school district requires multiple school buildings to use the same report card, you can save
time by copying the template from an existing report card that uses the same template and then
modifying it, as needed.
1. On the Templates tab in the Option column, select the File Header template piece.
Note: The File Header template piece MUST be the first piece in the list, and at
least, 1 must be entered in the Rows After column.
2. In the Seq# column, type 10 or 100.
Note: It is recommended to use sequence numbers in increments of 10 to allow
new numbers to be inserted between existing numbers.
3. In the Option column, select the template piece that you want to display at the top of the
report card.
Note: The template pieces that display in the Option column vary depending on
the template size and layout option selected on the General tab.
4. In the Seq# column, type a sequence number that represents the order in which the
template piece should display on the report card.
Template Tab on the Report Card Screen
5. In the Course list, select the course to which that template piece applies.
Note: All Classes is the default option. If you select nothing in the Course list it is
the same as if you selected All Classes.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
145
Report Cards and Interims
Note: ProgressBook GradeBook prints a Marks template piece for each course
name specified and in the sequence order assigned on the Courses tab if you
select All Classes or blank in the Course list. To ensure courses display in the
desired order and column format on the report card, select an individual course to
be used with a Marks template piece.
6. While formatting the report card template, you may perform any of the following optional
steps:
•
•
To apply the desired font to the text in the Font column, select one of the following
options:
•
Arial
•
Times
•
Verdana
To apply a point size, in the Size column, select a point size option.
Note: The default point size is 10; however, sizes range from 2 to 20 points.
•
To apply bold to the text, in the B column, click the check box.
•
To apply italic to the text, in the i column, click the check box.
•
In the Rows After column, type a number that represents the number of blank lines to
display after each template piece. The default number of rows after is 1.
Note: You may adjust the number of rows between template pieces as you
modify the report card.
Note: It is not recommended to enter 0 in the Rows After column when using any
of the Marks template pieces that span multiple columns or multiple pages.
•
To display the teacher’s last name next to the course name, above the Save button,
in the Print Teacher Names option, select the check box.
Seq# Column on the Template Tab
7. To continue building the report card template, repeat step 3 through step 6 to add
template pieces, as needed.
8. Select the Page Break template piece.
146
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Report Cards and Interims
Note: The Page Break template piece MUST be the last piece in the list to allow
separation between student’s report cards.
9. Click Save.
10. To view the report card layout, click the Preview link.
11. On the File Download window, click Open to view the template in a separate browser
window, or click Save to save the report card file on your hard drive or server.
Note: A blank page displays in the rtf file in Preview mode but does not actually
print.
12. Review the report card layout, and then close the report card preview window.
Report Card in RTF Format Example – Page 1
Report Card in RTF Format Example – Page 2
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
147
Report Cards and Interims
13. On the Template tab, make any necessary adjustments to the template, and review the
report card layout as many times as is necessary.
Note: You can preview a report card at any time without opening it from the
Report Cards screen by clicking
in the Actions column.
14. In the Web site banner, click Mappings to proceed to associate assessments with the
appropriate mapping identifiers.
Associate Assessments with Mapping Identifiers in Reporting Periods
To instruct ProgressBook GradeBook where the appropriate place is to put calculated attendance
assessments, comments and End of Year Placement assessments on the report card, you must
associate the specific assessment with a mapping identifier for each reporting period. The
mapping identifier is a code in the report card template that places the assessment in the
appropriate template piece on the report card. By default, all course assessments are printed in
the marks template piece. If you use letter or word recognition template pieces, you must map the
letter/word assessments to the template pieces.
1. On the Mappings tab, if you are creating traditional report cards, proceed to step 2. If you
are creating standards-based report cards, in the Course list, select the appropriate
course that includes the assessments to be mapped.
2. In the Quarter/Reporting Period list, select the appropriate mapping identifier for each
assessment. For example, you may select #Absent1# for the Days Absent assessment in
the Quarter 1 list, #Absent2# in the Quarter 2 list, etc.
Note: Mapping identifier options vary depending on the template being used.
Note: If you have created multiple comment assessments, you can associate the
same mapping identifier for multiple comment assessments in a class in a
reporting period.
3. Click Save.
Mappings Tab on the Report Card Screen
4. To continue associating assessments with mapping identifiers in the same course, repeat
step 2 through step 3.
148
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Report Cards and Interims
5. In the remaining courses, continue associating assessments with mapping identifiers
until you have associated assessments with mapping identifiers for all the courses that
display on the report card.
6. If you are creating standards-based report cards, in the Web site banner, click Messages
to proceed to add messages to your report card.
Add Messages to Report Cards
You may add custom text that appears on all students’ report cards such as an explanation of the
grades used, a message to the parents from the school district or simply the report card title. The
numbered message fields on this screen correspond to the numbered message template pieces
used on the Template tab.
1. On the Messages tab in the Message fields, type your desired descriptions, as needed:
•
Report Card Title – Text entered displays as part of the School Header template
piece.
•
Message fields – Text entered displays with the corresponding numbered Message
template piece.
•
Additional Mark Explanations – Text entered displays with Index template piece.
Note: To force a line feed or line break at the end of a line of text, enter the .rtf
code { \par}. Ensure to include the opening and closing brackets { } around the
code to prevent errors.
2. Click Save.
Messages Tab on the Report Card Screen
3. In the Web site banner, click the Preview link to ensure the message text entered displays
on the correct area of the report card.
Note: The corresponding Message template piece must be added in the
appropriate order on the Messages tab for the message to appear on the printed
report card.
4. In the Web site banner, click Compile to proceed to compile the report card.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
149
Report Cards and Interims
Compile Report Cards
The report card or interim must be compiled successfully before teachers can use it to enter
grades on the Report Card Entry screen. ProgressBook GradeBook runs numerous verifications
to ensure the report card is set up properly. Once the report card has been compiled, each time it
is changed, it must be recompiled. The status displays in the Compile Results column on the
Report Cards screen. You can easily see if the report card contains warnings or errors.
1. On the Web site banner, click the Compile link.
The compiled report card or interim displays in a separate browser window listing any
warnings or errors that were detected during compilation. A reference number displays
next to the description of each warning or error. This reference number is used for
troubleshooting purposes by ProgressBook GradeBook Support personnel. The following
warnings and/or errors may occur:
•
Warning – Potential errors were found during compilation, but teachers can use the
report card to enter grades on the Report Card Entry screen. It is recommended to
investigate the warnings and try to correct any issues.
•
Critical error – Errors were found during compilation that prevent the report card
from displaying and teachers from entering grades on the Report Card Entry screen
until they are corrected.
•
Severe error – Errors were found during compilation that prevent teachers from
entering grades on the Report Card Entry screen until they are corrected.
If there are no warnings or errors, the following message displays. “Congratulations, no
errors were found! The report card compiled successfully.” Proceed with step 7.
2. If there are any warnings or errors, review the description, and then click the Go link.
Error and Warning Messages after Compile
The screen where the issue occurred that caused the warning or error displays behind the
Compiled Report Card/Interim screen.
3. Troubleshoot the issue(s), as needed.
4. Return to the Compiled Report Card/Interim screen, and then click Refresh.
150
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Report Cards and Interims
If the warning or error was corrected, it does not display in the list. Proceed with step 5. If
the warning or error was not corrected, repeat step 2 through step 4 until the issue is
corrected. If you cannot correct the issue, follow your appropriate ProgressBook
GradeBook support channel.
5. On the Web site banner, click the Compile link again.
6. If the report card compiled without critical or severe errors, close the Compile Report
Card/Interim screen.
7. On the Web site banner, click the General tab.
8. In the Select the report card mode option, select Active to make the report card available
to teachers to enter grades.
9. Click Save.
10. On the Web site banner, click the Compile link for the final time.
11. Close the Compile Report Card/Interim screen.
Note: If you have to make changes to a report card in Active mode, you must first
change the report card mode to Testing.
Note: You can compile a report card without opening it on the Report Cards
screen by clicking the Compile All Active Changed Report Cards link or by clicking
in the Actions column.
Set Up Multiple Grade Books for Standards-Based Report
Cards
If your district uses standards-based report cards, at the beginning of the school year you can set
up teachers' grade books to automatically apply the Grading Scale Custom Setup 2 option. This
can help prevent mistakes in the grading scale process and the problems than can happen as a
result. You can use the Grade Book Configuration Utility to do the following actions:
•
Set the Grading Scale Setup option to Custom Setup 2 for all classes that are associated
with the courses attached to the specified report card on the Courses tab. By default, this
utility will only change the setup of classes that have not yet been changed from the
Default Grading Scale Setup option.
•
Set the report card option within the Custom Setup 2 configuration for these classes to
the report card for which the utility is run.
•
Set the grading scales and default calculations selected on the Assessments tab in the
specified report card for each class based on the course to which it is associated. Also,
you have the option to select near the bottom of the screen the default assessment,
which will be used when running the GradeBook Configuration Utility.
Note: The assessments that appear on the Assessments tab in the Default
Assessment drop-down list are assessments that are selected on the
Requirements tab.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
151
Report Cards and Interims
The utility will use all of the following logic to determine which classes it configures to the Custom
Setup 2 grading scale option:
•
Standard settings include only classes that remain on the default grading scale option,
meaning the teacher has not yet attempted to the grading scale configuration.
•
If the Override option is selected in the utility, it will reset classes that have already been
set up to a grading scale option.
•
Only classes associated with the courses that are associated with the course groups for
that report card.
•
A course group must have at least one assessment that has a default grading scale set.
The following tips may be useful when using the Grade Book Configuration Utility:
•
The utility can be run again with the default settings to set up newly added classes or to
add new report card assessments that were added to the report card after initial
configuration.
•
The utility would need to be run with the Override option on if a change was made to an
existing report card assessment and you wanted to update teachers’ grade books.
Although, this would result in resetting any changes teachers may have made to their
grading scales and/or calculation methods.
After the utility has been run to set up teachers’ grade books, it can be run again to set up new
classes that have been added to the system or to add Assessments and their respective grading
scales and calculations that were added to the report card. By default, this subsequent use of the
utility will not affect classes that have already been set up.
If the report card is set to not allow school administrators to update the report card setup, then
users with the School Administrator privileges cannot use the Grade Book Configuration Utility.
Make sure the report card is set to Elementary and Active before you begin.
1. On Report Cards screen in the Actions column, click
configured.
for the report card being
2. On the Standards Based Grade Book Configuration Utility window, to simply set up
teachers' grade books that were not previously set up to use the Grading Scale Custom
Setup 2 option or to add new assessments to report cards already being used in teacher's
grade books, click Configure Grade Books.
A message displays when the configuration has been completed successfully.
3. To update modified assessments for report cards already being used in teachers' grade
books, select Override the teachers' grade book setup, and then click Configure Grade
Books.
Any grading scales and calculation methods teachers had selected manually will be
overridden.
4. Close the Standards Based Grade Book Configuration Utility window.
152
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Report Cards and Interims
Override the teacher’s grade book setup Option on the Grade Book
Configuration Utility Window
Copy Report Cards
If your school district requires multiple school buildings to use the same report card, you can save
time by copying an existing report card and then modifying it as needed.
1. On the Report Card screen in the Actions column, click
want to copy.
next to the report card you
The copied report card displays in the next row with (Copy) appended to the name.
2. Next the copied report card, click
to open it.
3. On the General tab in the Enter a name for the report card field, change the name.
4. On the this tab, continue to make any necessary changes to the report card.
5. Click Save.
6. In the Report Card Builder on the other tabs, continue to make any necessary changes.
Delete Report Cards
You may delete a report card if you make a mistake while you are building it or have an unwanted
copy of a report card. If the report card has been used, you must first delete the marks associated
with it in the Student Report Mark table in the ProgressBook GradeBook database. Then you can
return to ProgressBook GradeBook to delete the report card. If you are not familiar with working
with the Student Report Mark table, contact your appropriate ProgressBook GradeBook support
channel for further assistance.
1. On the Report Card screen, click
next to the report card you want to delete to open it.
2. On the Report Card Screen near the bottom of the screen, click the Delete link.
3. On the Confirmation window, click OK.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
153
Report Cards and Interims
This page intentionally left blank.
154
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
General Maintenance
This chapter will assist you with the set up of your district’s data integration system and associating
district grade levels to state grade levels. In addition, you will learn how to check your district’s
current software version, recalculate grade books, permanently delete students as well as update
your email address and change your password.
Check Software Version
You can view the most current ProgressBook GradeBook software version.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under Tools, click Check Software Version.
On the Software Version screen, the first three digits that display under the Website
Version represent the version of the software application that your district is currently
using. For example, 7.1.2 is the current Website Version in “Software Version Screen” .
The subsequent numbers are meaningful only to ProgressBook GradeBook staff.
The Database Upgrade History displays all of the versions and dates that have been
installed to the ProgressBook GradeBook database.
Software Version Screen
2.
Review the screen, and to return to the Administrator Home Page, click Home.
Recalculate Grade Books
ProgressBook GradeBook calculates teacher grade books automatically by default. However, it
may be necessary to recalculate teacher grade books manually, if for example, changes are made
to grading scales.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under Tools, click Recalculate Gradebooks.
2. On the ReCalculate Gradebooks screen in the School list, select the appropriate school.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
155
General Maintenance
3. In the Period list, select the appropriate reporting period.
4. In the Scale list, select the appropriate grading scale.
ReCalculate Gradebooks Screen
5. Click ReCalculate.
Note: Recalculation could take several minutes depending on the number of
teacher grade books being recalculated and the speed of your network
connection.
Delete Students
The Delete Students option allows you to delete numerous students at once or individually from
ProgressBook GradeBook. This option permanently deletes all data associated with a student, so
you must carefully review the classes, assignment marks, report card marks, forms and
homeroom attendance marks before deleting. Students who have Special Services forms
associated with them cannot be deleted. Many different search options are available to assist in
finding the correct students to delete.
Delete Students Individually
1. On the Administrator Home Page under Tools, click Delete Students.
2. On the Delete Students screen, search for the student whom you want to delete.
a. In the School list, select the appropriate school building, and then click Search.
A list of all the students in the entire school displays if you do not enter any
information in the Grade, HR, ID or Last Name fields.
b. To narrow the search results, perform any of the following optional steps:
156
•
In the Grade list, select the grade level of the student for whom you are searching.
•
In the HR list, select the homeroom of the student for whom you are searching.
•
In the ID list, type the student’s identification number.
•
In the Last name field, type the student’s last name or partial last name for whom
you are searching.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
General Maintenance
A list of students displays that matches the search criteria entered. If the student has
Special Services forms,
displays next to the student’s name. You can place your
cursor over the icon to view the number of forms associated with the student. The check
box does not display in the Delete? column for students with forms.
3. In the Delete? column, click the check box for the student(s) you want to delete.
Delete? Column on the Delete Students Screen
4. Click Review student activity before deleting.
5. Review the student’s activity, and then click Delete Students.
Review Students Before Deleting
6. On the confirmation window, click OK.
Confirmation Message for Deleting Students
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
157
General Maintenance
Mass Delete Students
You may delete students in ProgressBook GradeBook, but when you do, all the data associated
with the students is also deleted from the system. For example, you can delete all students who
have graduated five years ago.
To return the fewest number of students when searching for students to delete, select as many of
the available options as possible in the Additional Search Criteria and Sorting Options areas.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under Tools, click Delete Students.
2. On the Delete Students screen in the Additional Search Criteria area on the left side of the
screen in the Enrollment Status list, select the appropriate code.
3. In one or more of the following lists, select greater than (>), less than (<) or equal to (=):
•
Birthday
•
Graduation Date
•
Last System Update
•
Withdrawal Date
4. To select the appropriate date for any of the lists selected previously, click
.
Note: Students who have Special Services forms associated with them cannot be
deleted.
5. To view students who have forms associated with them in the Show Students with Forms
option, select the check box.
6. To organize the results, in the Sorting Options area, select any of the following options in
ascending (Asc) or descending (Desc) order.
•
Birthday
•
Enrollment Status
•
Grade
•
Graduation Date
•
HR
•
ID
•
Last System Update
•
Name
•
School
•
Withdrawal Date
7. Click Search.
A list of students displays that matches the search criteria entered. If the student has
Special Services forms,
displays next to the student’s name. You can place your
cursor over the icon to view the number of forms associated with the student. The check
box does not display in the Delete? column for students with forms.
8. On the Delete Students screen in the Delete? column, click the check box of the
student(s) you want to delete.
158
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
General Maintenance
Note: On the Delete Students screen, click the Select All link to select all the
students in the list to delete. Click Unselect All to deselect all the students.
Select All and Unselect All Links on the Delete Students Screen
9. Click Review student activity before deleting.
10. Review the student’s activity, and then click Delete Students.
Delete Students Button on the Delete Students Screen
11. On the confirmation window, click OK.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
159
General Maintenance
“Students successfully deleted” Message
Associate District Grade Levels with State Grade Levels
Only school districts that use ProgressBook SpecialServices must associate state grade levels
with district grade levels in ProgressBook GradeBook to ensure that correct state grade levels are
used by ProgressBook SpecialServices for state reporting purposes.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under District Setup, click Grade Levels.
2. On the Grade Levels screen in the Edit column, click
want to associate.
for the district grade level you
Grade Levels Screen
3. In the Code field, enter the appropriate code.
Note: You can use a two-digit numeric or two-character alphabetic reference that
matches the grade level in the Code field. For example, you could enter a code of
01 for grade 1 and a code of KG for Kindergarten. The codes used in the Code
and Description field can be the same.
4. In the Description field, enter a grade level’s description.
160
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
General Maintenance
5. In the State Grade list, select the appropriate state grade level that you want to associate
with the district grade level.
Associate District with State Grade Levels
Note: The Transition Year refers to a student grade level that moves from one
building to another building. This field is no longer used.
6. Click Save.
7. To continue associating state grade levels with district grade levels, repeat step 2
through step 6.
Note: To delete an existing grade level, click
in the Delete column in the
appropriate row. You cannot delete an existing grade level if any data is
associated with it.
Update Email Address
The email address you enter is used mainly for communication purposes. If you are logged into
ProgressBook GradeBook as a teacher, the email address displays on the Parent Access Web
Site.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under Tools, click Update Email Address.
2. On the Update Your Email Address window in the Email Address field, type your email
address.
3. Click Update.
4. Close the Update Your Email Address window.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
161
General Maintenance
Update Your Email Address Window
Password Authentication
Your district may use Windows Authentication or ProgressBook GradeBook Authentication as the
method of validating user identity based on a user name and password. Depending on your
district’s policy, a single district may even use different authentication methods.
If your district uses Windows Authentication, ProgressBook GradeBook checks the Active
Directory for valid passwords; therefore, the following sections describing changing password
security settings do not apply.
If your district uses ProgressBook GradeBook Authentication, passwords are validated in the Staff
table in the District database. Several other password security settings can be modified in the
DistrictLogin table. See “Modify Password Security Settings in DistrictLogin Table” .
If your ProgressBook GradeBook system is integrated with a student information system, the user
names are imported from the student information system regardless of the authentication method
used. Even if ProgressBook GradeBook Authentication is used, user names are maintained in the
system information system, but passwords are maintained in ProgressBook GradeBook.
To begin using ProgressBook GradeBook Authentication in your district, perform the following
procedure.
Enable ProgressBook GradeBook Authentication
1. Open SQL Server Management Studio.
2. In the Object Explorer pane, expand the Databases node.
3. Expand the pb_master database.
4. Expand the Tables node, and then open the DistrictLogin table.
5. Locate the district for which you want to use ProgressBook GradeBook Authentication,
and type PB in the LoginMethod field.
Note: If you are using Windows Authentication, type WIN in this field.
162
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
General Maintenance
DistrictLogin Table
6. Click out of the row to save the changes, and close the DistrictLogin table.
Password Settings
If you are using ProgressBook GradeBook Authentication, the network or server administrator can
modify the following password security settings to meet your district’s needs:
•
Auto-completion
•
Caching secure content
•
Strong passwords
•
Expiration intervals
•
Length
Password auto-completion and caching secure content can be modified in the Web.config file, and
the remaining settings can be modified in the DistrictLogin table.
Modify Password Security Settings in Web.config File
The Web server configuration file (Web.config) contains ProgressBook GradeBook Web site
configuration parameters required by ASP.NET pages including the password security settings
described as follows. This file is located in the root directory of the ProgressBook GradeBook Web
application. Any changes you make to the Web.config file affects all ProgressBook GradeBook
user accounts in all districts.
Note: It is recommended to change the Web.config file when school is not in
session since the ProgressBook GradeBook Web site automatically restarts once
the changes have been saved.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
163
General Maintenance
Password Auto-complete
Password auto-completion may be enabled or disabled as desired. This setting is disabled by
default, so passwords cannot be completed automatically as users begin to type in the Password
field.
Note: The autocomplete settings, specifically Forms and User names and
password forms, must be turned on in Internet Explorer for password
auto-completion to be effective in ProgressBook GradeBook.
1. On the Web server, open Web.config.
2. To enable password auto-completion, locate the autocomplete property, as shown in the
following example, and change the value to on.
<add key=”autocomplete” value=”off”/>
3. Save and close Web.config.
Cache Secure Content
Caching secure content may be enabled or disabled, as desired. Caching secure content is
enabled by default, so previously viewed ProgressBook GradeBook screens can be viewed in the
browser history after a user has logged out.
1. On the Web server, open Web.config.
2. To disable this setting, locate the allow caching property, as shown in the following
example, and change the value to No.
<add key=”allow_caching” value=”yes”/>
3. Save and close Web.config.
Note: Disabling caching secure content is not recommended because it may slow
Web site performance.
Modify Password Security Settings in DistrictLogin Table
The DistrictLogin table contains ProgressBook GradeBook configuration parameters at the district
level including the password security settings described as follows and is located in the pb_master
database. You can change the following password settings for individual districts.
Strong Passwords
If strong passwords are enabled, they must be at least three characters in length, must include at
least one numeral (0-9) and one uppercase letter and one lowercase letter. However, strong
passwords are not required and are disabled by default. The default value is Null.
1. Open SQL Server Management Studio.
2. In the Object Explorer pane, expand the Databases node.
3. Expand the pb_master database.
4. Expand the Tables node, and then open the DistrictLogin table.
5. To enable strong passwords, locate the appropriate district, and in the StrongPassword
field, enter 1.
164
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
General Maintenance
Note: The StrongPassword field is the last field listed in the row. Use the scroll
bar at the bottom of the table window to navigate to the field.
StrongPassword Field in the DistrictLogin Table
6. To save the changes, in the DistrictLogin table, click out of the row.
Password Expiration
Passwords may be set to expire within a desired time interval, for example, at the end of the
school year or every 90 days. Passwords are set not to expire by default, and the password
expiration interval default value is Null. If you want to use strong passwords, it is recommended
to set password expiration as well.
1. Open SQL Server Management Studio.
2. In the Object Explorer pane, expand the Databases node.
3. Expand the pb_master database.
4. Expand the Tables node, and then open the DistrictLogin table.
5. Locate the appropriate district, and enter a number that represents the amount of time in
which the password will expire in the PasswordAge field. For example, to set passwords
to expire every 30 days, enter 30 in the PasswordAge field.
Note: You can also set unique password expiration dates for individual staff
accounts on the Add Staff window. See “Add Staff” .
PasswordAge Field in the DistrictLogin Table
6. To save the changes in the DistrictLogin table, click out of the row.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
165
General Maintenance
Minimum Password Length
A minimum length of passwords used in ProgressBook GradeBook is not required; therefore, the
default value is Null. You can set the minimum password length independently of using strong
passwords.
1. Open SQL Server Management Studio.
2. In the Object Explorer pane, expand the Databases node.
3. Expand the pb_master database.
4. Expand the Tables node, and then open the DistrictLogin table.
5. To change the minimum password length, locate the appropriate district, and in the
PassMinLength field, enter a value of 1 or higher.
PassMinLength Field in the DistrictLogin Table
6. To save the changes in the DistrictLogin table, click out of the row.
Change Password
If your district has enabled the Staff Password Changes option, the Change Your Password link
displays on each user’s home page. See “District Features” . If the Staff Password Changes
option is disabled and you are using Windows Authentication, the following message displays on
the Login screen: “Your district does not allow password changes from ProgressBook GradeBook.
Please contact your system administrator if you have questions.”
ProgressBook GradeBook recognizes each user by individual login, so depending on how your
school district is set up, changing your password in ProgressBook GradeBook may also change
it in other systems. Make sure your ProgressBook GradeBook users are aware of your password
policy.
1. On the Administrator Home Page under Tools, click Change Your Password.
2. On the Change Password screen in the Old Password field, type the old password.
3. In the New Password field, type the new password.
If strong passwords are enabled, warning messages may display if users enter a password
that does not meet your district’s password requirements. If your district uses the Windows
Authentication login method, warning messages will not display.
166
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
General Maintenance
Warning Message about Password Requirements
4. In the Confirm New Password field, type the new password again.
5. Click Change Password.
The Login screen displays.
6. Using your new password, log in to ProgressBook GradeBook.
Use ProgressBook GradeBook Help
ProgressBook GradeBook Help provides overview, procedural and reference information about
ProgressBook GradeBook. You can click the Help link in the upper-right corner on any
ProgressBook GradeBook screen to view the help topic related to the screen you are viewing.
ProgressBook GradeBook Help displays in a separate browser window where you can browse the
Table of Contents for specific topic titles, search the Index by using keywords or type a word or
phrase in the Search field to return a list of related help topics. You can print any help topic by
clicking
located in the Navigation pane.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
167
General Maintenance
Table of Contents and Help Topic in ProgressBook GradeBook
Help
Enable Default District ID Setting
The network or server administrator can enable or disable at any time the ability to automatically
populate the District ID field on the Login screen with the last district ID that was entered by a user
when logging into ProgressBook GradeBook.
The application settings configuration file (appSettings.config) contains ProgressBook
GradeBook Web site configuration parameters required by ASP.NET pages including automatic
population of the district ID field setting described as follows. This file is located in the config
subdirectory of the root directory of the ProgressBook GradeBook Web application. Any changes
you make to the appSettings.config file affects all ProgressBook GradeBook user accounts in all
districts.
1. On the Web server, in the \config folder, open appSettings.config.
2. To enable automatic population of the District ID field, locate the remember_district_id
property, as shown in the following example, and change the value to yes. The default
value is yes.
<add key=”remember_district_id” value=”no”/>
3. Save and close appSettings.config.
4. Restart IIS.
168
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Reports
A variety of Classic and Report Builder reports are available on the Administrator Home Page from
the Run a Report list. Depending on what type of grading scale setup, such as Default, Custom
Setup 1 or Custom Setup 2, is used in teachers’ classes determines if you can use a Classic or
Report Builder report. “Types of Reports and Corresponding Grading Scale Setups” displays the
type of reports that will work with which type of grading scale setup.
Types of Reports and Corresponding Grading Scale Setups
Default and Custom
Setup 1
Report
Custom Setup 2
Classic Reports
Daily ProgressBook Attendance
Yes
Yes
Ineligibility Report
Yes
Yes
Lunch Counts
Yes
Yes
Period Attendance
Yes
Yes
Period Attendance Audit
Yes
Yes
Parent Access Login Activity Audit
Yes
Yes
Posted Homework & Marks To Web
Audit
Yes
No
Report Card Verification
Yes
Yes
Report Cards
Yes
Yes
Staff Attendance Audit
Yes
Yes
View Saved Reports
Yes
Yes
Report Builder Reports
Class Assignment Marks Admin
Yes
Yes
Homework and Marks Posted to Parent
Access Admin
Yes
Yes
Report Card Marks Admin
Yes
Yes
Section Info Meeting Times
Yes
Yes
Student Daily Attendance
Yes
Yes
Student Demographics
Yes
Yes
Student Section Enrollment
Yes
Yes
YTD (Year to Date) Final Grade Admin
Yes
No
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
169
Reports
Report Builder Reports
This section describes how to generate user-defined Report Builder reports through the selection
of numerous filter options as well as numerous column options for displaying reports results. Once
you have selected the desired settings, you can save the report with those settings and
individualized name to use in the future. For information on managing Report Builder reports and
users’ access to the reports, as well as guidelines on creating custom reports in Microsoft SQL
Server Report Builder 2.0 for use in ProgressBook GradeBook, refer to the ProgressBook Report
Builder Management Guide.
The following Report Builder reports are available to users with master and school administrator
privileges on the Administrator Home Page:
•
Class Assignment Marks Admin – For Default and Custom Setup 1 teachers’ classes,
the report displays class assignment mark information for individual or multiple teachers’
classes in individual or multiple reporting periods, and for Custom Setup 2 teachers’
classes, it displays class assignment assessment mark information for individual or
multiple teachers’ classes in individual or multiple reporting periods.
•
Homework and Marks Posted to Parent Access Admin – Displays assignments and
assignment types for a school grouped by teacher and class within a date range with an
indication of whether or not marks are posted to the ParentAccess Web site.
•
Report Card Marks Admin –Provides numerous options for presenting report card
information for individual or multiple teachers’ class(es). While this report is designed
similarly to secondary report cards, it can also be used to view report card grades for
elementary classes. For example, you can apply specific filter options to create a report
that displays students with grades above or below a grade threshold.
•
Section Info Meeting Times – Displays class records for individual or multiple schools in
the Sif tables and in ProgressBook tables, if the data exists.
•
Student Daily Attendance – Displays student and daily attendance records for
individual or multiple schools in the Sif tables and in ProgressBook tables, if the data
exists.
•
Student Demographics – Provides numerous options for displaying student
demographic information for individual or multiple teachers’ classes, class groups or
homerooms.
•
Student Section Enrollment – Displays students’ class records for individual or multiple
schools in the Sif tables and in ProgressBook tables, if the data exists.
•
YTD Final Grade Admin – Provides numerous options for displaying year to date grade
information for students in a teacher’s class or class group. The YTD Final Grade Report
can only be used on classes where the YTD Grade calculation has been enabled on the
report card for the class. This report cannot be used on classes using standards-based
grading.
Naming conventions for reporting periods such as Quarter, Period, Marking Period, Grading
Period, etc., on the Report Viewer screen are defined by the school district.
The appearance of this icon
in the top right corner of the banner indicates that the report is a
core report—provided by ProgressBook GradeBook—or a user-defined version of a core report.
This icon does not display for add-on reports—reports that have been customized and then
uploaded by your support staff.
170
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Reports
Once you have generated the report, numerous features are available as shown in “Report Builder
Report Options” .
Report Builder Report Options
Feature
Description
Click this icon to view the report.
Click this icon to view the report.
Click this icon to show report headers, required parameters, optional filters and
columns.
Click this icon to hide report headers, required parameters, optional filters and
columns.
Click this icon to save the report with the selected parameters, filters and
columns, type the unique report name in the New report name field and click
Save.
Click this icon to navigate to a specific student on the report. This icon opens the
Document Map pane where you can choose a student’s name. This feature is
only available when using Internet Explorer.
Click this icon to navigate to the next page in the report.
Click this icon to navigate to the last page in the report.
Click this icon to navigate to the previous page.
Click this icon to navigate to the first page.
Type the page number in the field, and then press <Enter>.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
171
Reports
Report Builder Report Options
Feature
Description
Select the desired percentage in the list that represents the display size. This
feature is only available when using Internet Explorer.
Type the word or phrase in the blank field next to Find, and click Find. Click Next
to search for next instance of the word or phrase. This feature is only available
when using Internet Explorer.
Select the desired format in the list, and click Export. When prompted, click either
Open or Save. If you select Open, the report opens in the software application
associated with the file format you selected. You must have the appropriate
application installed on your computer to read and modify the report file. The
following file formats are available:
• XML File with Report Data – Extensible Markup Language file format viewed
in a Web browser with only data; there is no page formatting, headers, footers,
lines or graphic images.
• CSV – Comma-separated values file format in plain text format.
• Acrobat (PDF) File – Portable document file format than can be viewed in
Adobe Reader but not edited.
• MHTML (Web Archive) – Short for MIME HTML file format and also referred to
as MHT. This is a Web page archive format used to bind images, Flash
animations, Java applets, audio files, etc., together with HTML code into a
single file. This file format can be viewed in a Web browser and is supported in
the following browser versions: Internet Explorer 5.5 and later, Firefox 1.5 and
later and Safari 3.0 and later.
• Excel – Format provides full functionality of Microsoft Excel.
• TIFF – Large graphic file format that may take longer to open than other file
types and cannot be edited.
• Word – Format provides full functionality of Microsoft Word.
Click this icon to print the report. If prompted to install SQL Server Reporting
Services 2008 ActiveX control, continue to install it on the computer, so you can
print the report. The print feature is only available when using Internet Explorer. If
you are not able to install the ActiveX control, proceed to export the report to an
acceptable file format, and then print the report from that software application.
Click this icon to sort the columns in ascending or descending order.
Click this icon to delete any report you have customized. Click this icon under the
report name in the Reports list on the Class Dashboard or Teacher Home Page.
172
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Reports
Class Assignment Marks Admin Report
For Default and Custom Setup 1 teachers’ classes, the report displays class assignment mark
information for individual or multiple teachers’ classes in individual or multiple reporting periods,
and for Custom Setup 2 teachers’ classes, it displays class assignment assessment mark
information for individual or multiple teachers’ classes in individual or multiple reporting
periods.This report is available to users with master, school administrator, school support and
principal privileges. Users logged in with School Support privileges, must access the report from
the Principal Home Page.
1. On the Administrator Home Page in the Run a Report list, select Class Assignment
Marks Admin, and then click Run.
2. On the ProgressBook Report Viewer window, enter the name of the report in the Report
Header field. Class Assignment Marks displays by default, but you may change the name,
if desired.
3. In the Set Required Parameters area, select the appropriate teacher(s) in the Teacher(s)
list.
Note: For users logged in with school administrator, school support or principal
privileges, only the teachers in the school buildings to which you have access
display in the list. For users logged in with master privileges, all the teachers in all
the school buildings display.
Note: If there are no available choices in which to select, then No teacher
available displays with a red background.
4. In the Set Required Parameters area, select the appropriate reporting period(s) in the
Reporting Period(s) list.
Note: If there are no available choices from which to select, then No reporting
period available displays with a red background.
5. Select one of the following Include Hidden Student(s) options:
•
Yes – Include students that have been hidden from a teacher's class roster.
•
No – Do not include students that have been hidden from a teacher's class roster.
6. In the Set Optional Filters area, select the appropriate option(s) in the Field Name list. See
“Class Assignment Marks Admin Report – Field Name Options” for descriptions of all the
available options.
7. Select one of the following options in the Operation list if it is available. The available
options may vary depending on the option you selected in the Field Name list.
•
Is Equal To
•
Is Not Equal To
•
Is Less Than
•
Is Less Than or Equal To
•
Is Greater Than
•
Is Greater Than or Equal To
•
Is Before
•
Is Before or On
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
173
Reports
•
Is After
•
Is After or On
•
Begins With
•
Does Not Begin With
•
Ends With
•
Does Not End With
•
Contains
•
Does Not Contain
•
Has A Value
•
Does Not Have A Value
8. Type the appropriate value in the Value field.
Note: The available options and acceptable values vary depending on the option
you selected in the Field Name list. You may be able to enter only alphabetical or
only numeric characters depending on the option you selected in the Field Name
list. If you selected an option in the Field Name list that ends in “Indicator,” then
you must select the Yes or No option in the Value field. If you selected an option
in the Field Name list that requires a date, a calendar becomes available in the
Value field. If you selected Has a Value or Does Not Have a Value in the
Operation list, then the Value field is not available.
Class Assignment Marks Admin Report
9. Specific selected columns indicated by a check mark display on the report by default. If
you have selected specific filter options in the Field Name list and you want that
information to display on the report, make sure to select the corresponding column name
in the Columns list. Options in the Field Name list that end in “Indicator” do not have a
corresponding column to display.
10. Click View Report.
The report displays at the bottom of the window.
174
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Reports
Note: The field or list displays red indicating an unacceptable value was entered
or a required field was left blank.
11. To save the report with your selected parameters, filters and columns, click
Save
Setup As. On the Save Setup As window in the New report name field, type the unique
report name, and in the New description field, type the description of the report. Then,
click Save.
The following message displays at the bottom of the window, “Report setup saved
successfully.”
Class Assignment Marks Admin Report – Field Name Options
Option
Description
Assigned Date
Date the assignment was assigned.
Assignment Missing Indicator
Indicates whether the assignment is missing. If you select this
option, you must select Yes or No in the Value field.
Assignment Missing Status
Name
Indicates whether the assignment is missing. If you select this
option, you must type Missing in the Value field.
Assignment Name
Name of the assignment.
Assignment Past Due Indicator
Indicates whether the assignment is late. If you select this option,
you must select Yes or No in the Value field.
Assignment Past Due Status
Name
Indicates whether the assignment is late. If you select this option,
you must type Past Due in the Value field.
Assignment Type Code
Code representing the assignment type associated with the
assignment.
Assignment Type Name
Assignment type associated with the assignment.
Assignment Type Weight
Weight of the assignment type associated with the assignment.
Assignment Weight
Weight of the assignment.
Class Enrollment Status Name
Indicates whether the student is active in the class. If you select
this option, you must type Active, Withdrawn or Future in the
Value field.
Class Name
Name of class in which the student is enrolled. If no class name
is assigned, then course name and section display.
Due Date
Date the assignment is due.
Exclude Mark from Class
Indicator
Indicates the assignment was excluded from students' averages
for the entire class. If you select this option, you must select Yes
or No in the Value field.
Exclude Mark from Class Status
Name
Indicates the assignment was excluded from students' averages
for the entire class. If you select this option, you must type
Exclude in the Value field.
Exclude Mark from Student
Indicator
Indicates the assignment was excluded from an individual
student's average. If you select this option, you must select Yes
or No in the Value field.
Exclude Mark from Student
Status Name
Indicates the assignment was excluded from an individual
student's average. If you select this option, you must type
Exclude in the Value field.
Grade Level Name
Grade level in which the student is enrolled.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
175
Reports
Class Assignment Marks Admin Report – Field Name Options
Option
Description
HomeRoom ID
Code that identifies the homeroom to which the student is
assigned.
Mark Comment
Comment made by the teacher about the assignment.
Mark Earned
Mark given by the teacher for the assignment.
Mark Letter Grade
Letter grade equivalent to the mark earned on the assignment
based on the grading scale used.
Mark Value
Numeric mark equivalent to the mark earned on the assignment
based on the GUI option of the mark type used by assignment
type for that assignment.
Possible Points
Total value of the assignment.
Reporting Period Long Name
Name of the reporting period, which is based on the Term Begin
and Term End dates, specified on the Reporting Periods screen.
Reporting Period Short Name
Short name of the reporting period as specified on the Reporting
Periods screen and used in the Grading Period list on the Class
Dashboard and Report Card Entry screen.
Roster Order
Order in which the class was assigned on the Class Roster
screen.
Student Assignment Type
Average
Average of the assignment type associated with assignment.
Student Assignment Type Mark
Mark equivalent to the average of the assignment type
associated with assignment.
Student Group Name
Name of student group within a class.
Student Hidden Indicator
Indicates the student is hidden in the class. If you select this
option, you must select Yes or No in the Value field.
Student Hidden Status Name
Indicates the student is hidden in the class. If you select this
option, you must type Hidden in the Value field.
Student ID
District code that identifies the student.
Student Name
Full name of the student.
Student Reporting Period
Average
Student's average in the class in the reporting period.
Student Reporting Period Mark
Mark equivalent to the student's average in the class in the
reporting period.
Teacher Names
Name of the primary teacher associated with the class.
Homework and Marks Posted to Parent Access Admin Report
The Homework and Marks Posted to Parent Access Admin Report displays assignments and
assignment types for a school grouped by teacher and class within a date range with an indication
of whether or not marks are posted to the ParentAccess Web site.
1. On the Administrator Home Page in the Run a Report list, select Homework and Marks
Posted to Parent Access Admin, and then click Run.
2. In the Report Header field, enter the name of the report. Homework and Marks Posted to
Parent Access - Administrative displays by default, but you may change the name if
desired.
176
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Reports
3. In the Select Required Parameters area in the School Name list, select the appropriate
school.
Note: Only the schools to which you have access display in list.
Note: If there are no available choices from which to select, then No school
available displays with a red background.
4. Click in the Start Date field, and choose a date from the calendar.
5. Click in the End Date field, and choose a date from the calendar.
6. In the Published Marks to Web option, select one of the following options:
•
Yes - Displays assignments in which marks were posted to the ParentAccess Web
site.
•
No - Displays assignments in which marks were not posted to the ParentAccess Web
site.
7. In the Published Assignment To Homework option, select one of the following options:
•
Yes - Displays only classes in which homework and assignment marks were posted
to the ParentAccess Web site.
•
No - Displays only classes in which homework and assignment marks were not
posted the ParentAccess Web site.
8. In the Set Optional Filters area, select the appropriate option in the Field Name list. See
“Homework and Marks Posted to Parent Access Admin Report – Field Name Options” for
descriptions of all available options.
9. Select one of the following options in the Operation list if it is available. The available
options may vary depending on the option you selected in the Field Name list.
•
Is Equal To
•
Is Not Equal To
•
Is Before
•
Is Before Or On
•
Is After
•
Is After Or On
•
Begins With
•
Does Not Begin With
•
Ends With
•
Does Not End With
•
Contains
•
Does Not Contain
•
Has a Value
•
Does Not Have a Value
10. Type the appropriate value in the Value field.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
177
Reports
Note: The available options and acceptable values vary depending on the option
you selected in the Field Name list. You may be able to enter only alphabetical or
only numeric characters depending on the option you selected in the Field Name
list. If you selected an option in the Field Name list that ends in “Indicator,” then
you must select the Yes or No option in the Value field. If you selected an option
in the Field Name list that requires a date, a calendar becomes available in the
Value field. If you selected Has a Value or Does Not Have a Value in the
Operation list, then the Value field is not available.
11. Click View Report.
The report displays at the bottom of the window.
Note: The field or list displays red indicating an unacceptable value was entered
or a required field was left blank.
12. To save the report with your selected parameters, filters and columns, click
Save
Setup As. On the Save Setup As window in the New report name field, type the unique
report name, and in the New description field, type the description of the report. Then,
click Save.
13. The following message displays at the bottom of the window, “Report setup saved
successfully.”
Homework and Marks Posted to Parent Access Report Viewer Window
178
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Reports
Homework and Marks Posted to Parent Access Report in PDF Format
Homework and Marks Posted to Parent Access Admin Report – Field Name Options
Option
Description
Assignment Date
Date of the assignment.
Assignment Name
Name of the assignment.
Assignment Type Name
Name of the assignment type.
Class Name
Name of the class.
Due Date
Date the assignment is due.
Floating Indicator
Indicates if this is a floating assignment.
School Name
Name of the school.
Teacher Name
Name of the teacher.
Report Card Marks Admin Report
The Report Card Marks Admin report provides numerous options for displaying report card mark
information for individual or multiple teachers in individual or multiple reporting period(s).
This report is available to users with master, school administrator, school support and principal
privileges. Users logged in with School Support privileges, must access the report from the
Principal Home Page.
1. On the Administrator Home Page, select Report Card Marks Admin in the Run a Report
list and then click Run.
2. On the ProgressBook Report Viewer window, enter the name of the report in the Report
Header field.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
179
Reports
Report Card Marks displays by default, but you may change the name if desired.
3. In the Set Required Parameters area, select the appropriate report card in the Report
Card list.
Note: If there are no available choices in which to select, No report card available
displays with a red background.
4. In the Set Required Parameters area, select the appropriate teacher(s) in the Teachers
list.
Note: Only the teachers in the schools to which you have access display in the
list.
Note: If there are no available choices from which to select, No teacher available
displays with a red background.
5. In the Set Required Parameters area, select the appropriate reporting period(s) in the
Reporting Period(s) list.
Note: If there are no available choices in which to select, No reporting period
available displays with a red background.
6. Select one of the following Include Hidden Student(s) options:
•
Yes – Include students that have been hidden from a teacher's class roster.
•
No – Do not include students that have been hidden from a teacher's class roster.
7. In the Set Optional Filters area, select the appropriate option(s) in the Field Name list. See
“Report Card Marks Admin Report – Field Name Options” for descriptions of all the
available options.
8. Select one of the following options in the Operation list if it is available. The available
options may vary depending on the option you selected in the Field Name list.
180
•
Is Equal To
•
Is Not Equal To
•
Is Before
•
Is Before or On
•
Is After
•
Is After or On
•
Is Less Than
•
Is Less Than or Equal To
•
Is Greater Than
•
Is Great Than or Equal To
•
Begins With
•
Does Not Begin With
•
Ends With
•
Does Not End With
•
Contains
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Reports
•
Does Not Contain
•
Has A Value
•
Does Not Have A Value
9. Type the appropriate value in the Value field.
Note: The available options and acceptable values in the Value field may vary
depending on the option you selected in the Field Name list. You may be able to
enter only alphabetical or numerical characters depending on the option you
selected in the Field Name list. If you selected an option in the Field Name list that
ends in “Indicator,” then you must select the Yes or No option in the Value field. If
you selected an option in the Field Name list that requires a date, a calendar
becomes available in the Value field. If you selected Has a Value or Does Not
Have a Value in the Operation list, then the Value field is not available.
Note: You cannot select any columns in the Add & Remove Columns area;
however, the Student Name, Course, Assessment and Reporting Period columns
display by default on the report. Options in the Field Name list that end in
“Indicator” do not have a corresponding column to display.
Report Card Marks Admin Report
10. Click View Report.
The report displays at the bottom of the window.
Note: The field or list displays red indicating an unacceptable value was entered
or a required field was left blank.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
181
Reports
11. To save the report with your selected parameters, filters and columns, click
Save
Setup As. On the Save Setup As window in the New report name field, type the unique
report name, and in the New description field, type the description of the report. Then,
click Save.
The following message displays at the bottom of the window, “Report setup saved
successfully.”
Report Card Marks Admin Report – Field Name Options
Option
Description
Assessment Name
Name of assessment as it displays on the report card.
Assessment Order
Order in which the assessment is displayed on the report card.
Birth Date
Date of birth of the student.
Class Enrollment Status Name
Indicates whether the student is active in the class. If you select
this option, you must type Active, Withdrawn or Future option in
the Value field.
Counselor Name
Name of the guidance counselor assigned to the student.
Course Abbrev Name
Abbreviation of course name as specified on the Update Course
window.
Course ID
District identification code that represents the course.
Course Name
Name of course as specified on the Update Course window.
Course Short Name
Short name of course as specified on the Update Course
window.
Course Ungraded Indicator
Indicates whether the course is ungraded as specified on the
Update Course window. Usually study halls and lunch are
specified as ungraded courses. If you select this option, you
must select Yes or No in the Value field.
Enrollment Date
Date on which the student enrolled in the school.
Enrollment Status Code
Code that represents whether the student is active or inactive in
the school in which the student is enrolled.
Exclude from Parent Access
Indicator
Indicates whether or not the report card has been designated to
display on the ParentAccess Web Site. If you select this option,
you must select Yes or No in the Value field.
Gender Code
Code that represents whether a student is female or male.
Interim End Date
Last date of the interim as specified on the Reporting Periods
screen.
Mark
Grade entered for an assessment on the Report Card Entry
screen.
Mark Point Value
Numeric mark point equivalent to the grade entered for an
assessment on the Report Card Entry screen based on the
grading scale selected for the report card.
Indicates whether the student's information has been disabled on
the ParentAccess Web Site. If a parent account is associated
Parent Access Disabled Indicator with multiple student accounts, the parent account can still
access the other student accounts. If you select this option, you
must select Yes or No in the Value field.
182
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Reports
Report Card Marks Admin Report – Field Name Options
Option
Description
Reporting Period Calculation
Code
Code that represents the calculation method selected for each
grade calculation method as specified on the System Calcs tab
in the Report Card Builder.
Reporting Period End Date
Last date of the reporting period as specified on the Reporting
Periods screen.
Reporting Period Name
Name of the reporting period as specified on the Reporting
Periods screen.
Reporting Period Order
Order in which the reporting periods display on the report card as
specified on the Periods tab in the Report Card Builder.
Reporting Period Short Name
Short name of the reporting period as specified on the Reporting
Periods screen and used in the Grading Period list on the Class
Dashboard and Report Card Entry screen.
Reporting Period Start Date
First date of the reporting period as specified on the Reporting
Periods screen.
Reporting Period Type Code
Code that indicates whether Gradebook Range was selected for
the reporting period as specified on the Reporting Periods
screen. Reporting periods that display in the Grading Period list
on the Class Dashboard are set as Gradebook Range.
Staff ID
District code that identifies the staff user account.
Student First Name
First name of the student.
Student ID
District code that identifies the student.
Student Last Name
Last name of the student.
Student Middle Name
Middle name of the student.
Student Name
Full name of student.
Teacher First Name
First name of the primary teacher associated with the class.
Teacher Last Name
Last name of the primary teacher associated with the class.
Teacher Name
Full name of the primary teacher associated with the class.
Section Info Meeting Times Integration Report
Users with master and school administrator privileges can use the Section Info Meeting Times
Integration Report to troubleshoot data discrepancies between class records in the Sif tables,
located in the district database, and in ProgressBook tables, if the data exists. This report is
available to districts using any student information systems that use Sif tables in the batch data
integration process.
1. On the Administrator Home Page, select Section Info Meeting Times in the Run a Report
list and then click Run.
2. On the ProgressBook Report Viewer window, enter the name of the report in the Report
Header field. Section Info Meeting Times Integration Report displays by default but you
may change the name if desired.
3. In the Set Required Parameters area, select the appropriate school(s) in the Schools list.
Note: Only the schools to which you have access display in the list.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
183
Reports
Note: If there are no available choices from which to select, No school available
displays with a red background.
4. Select one of the following Include Null Schools options:
•
Yes – Include class records in the student information system that do not have
matching records in ProgressBook tables.
•
No – Do not include class records in the student information system that do not have
matching records in ProgressBook tables.
5. In the Set Optional Filters area, the options listed, with the exception of Teacher Names,
use the following naming convention: table name [space] field name. In the option Class
Class DBID, Class DBID refers to the field in the ProgressBook Class table. In the Sif
SectionInfo MeetingTime TimetableDay option, TimetableDay refers to the field in the Sif
SectionInfo MeetingTime table. Select any of the appropriate options in the Field Name
list.
•
Class Class DBID
•
Class DistrictClassID
•
Class SectionDescr
•
Course CourseName
•
Course DistrictCourseID
•
School SchoolName
•
School SchoolShortName
•
Sif SectionInfo MeetingTime TimetableDay
•
Sif SectionInfo MeetingTime TimetablePeriod
•
Sif SectionInfo ScheduleInfo ScheduleInfo Id
•
Sif SectionInfo ScheduleInfo SectionInfo Id
•
Sif SectionInfo ScheduleInfo TermInfoRefId – GUID
•
Sif SectionInfo SectionInfo RefId
•
Sif SectionInfo SectionInfo SchoolCourseInfoRefId – GUID
•
Sif TermInfo TermInfo Description
•
Sif TermInfo TermInfo EndDate
•
Sif TermInfo TermInfo RelativeDuration
•
Sif TermInfo TermInfo StartDate
•
Sif TermInfo TermInfo TermCode
•
Teacher Names
6. Select one of the following options in the Operation list if it is available. The available
options may vary depending on the option you selected in the Field Name list.
184
•
Is Equal To
•
Is Not Equal To
•
Is Less Than
•
Is Less Than or Equal To
•
Is Greater Than
•
Is Greater Than or Equal To
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Reports
•
Is Before
•
Is Before or On
•
Is After
•
Is After or On
•
Begins With
•
Does Not Begin With
•
Ends With
•
Does Not End With
•
Contains
•
Does Not Contain
•
Has a Value
•
Does Not Have a Value
7. Type the appropriate value in the Value field.
Note: For options in the Field Name list that end in “RefId,” you must enter the
GUID in the Value field in the same format as it is in the field in the table. If you
selected Has a Value or Does Not Have a Value in the Operation list, then the
Value field is not available.
.
Section Info Meeting Times Integration Report
8. Specific selected columns indicated by a check mark display on the report by default. If
you have selected specific filter options in the Field Name list and you want that
information to display on the report, make sure to select the corresponding column name
in the Columns list.
9. Click View Report.
The report displays at the bottom of the window.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
185
Reports
Note: The field or list displays red indicating an unacceptable value was entered
or a required field was left blank.
10. To save the report with your selected parameters, filters and columns, click
Save
Setup As. On the Save Setup As window in the New report name field, type the unique
report name, and in the New description field, type the description of the report. Then,
click Save.
The following message displays at the bottom of the window, “Report setup saved
successfully.”
Student Daily Attendance Integration Report
Users with master and school administrator privileges can use the Student Daily Attendance
Integration Report to troubleshoot data discrepancies between student and daily attendance
records in the Sif tables, located in the district database, and in ProgressBook tables, if the data
exists. This report is available to districts using any student information systems that use Sif tables
in the batch data integration process.
1. On the Administrator Home Page, select Student Daily Attendance in the Run a Report
list and then click Run.
2. On the ProgressBook Report Viewer window, enter the name of the report in the Report
Header field. Student Daily Attendance Integration Report displays by default but you may
change the name if desired.
3. In the Set Required Parameters area, select the appropriate school(s) in the Schools list.
Note: Only the schools to which you have access display in the list.
Note: If there are no available choices from which to select, No school available
displays with a red background.
4. Select one of the following Include Null Schools options:
•
Yes – Include student or attendance records in the student information system that do
not have matching records in ProgressBook tables.
•
No – Do not include student or attendance records in the student information system
that do not have matching records in ProgressBook tables.
5. In the Set Optional Filters area, the options listed use the following naming convention:
table name [space] field name. In the option AbsenceReason AbsenceReasonCode,
AbsenceReasonCode refers to the field in the ProgressBook AbsenceReason table. In the
Sif StudentDailyAttendance DailyAttendanceCode AttendanceCodeInfoRefId option,
AttendanceCodeInfoRefId refers to the field in the Sif StudentDailyAttendance
DailyAttendanceCode table. Select any of the appropriate options in the Field Name list.
186
•
AbsenceReason AbsenceReasonCode
•
AbsenceReason Description
•
AttendanceNote AttendanceNoteCode
•
AttendanceNote Description
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Reports
•
Formatted Attendance Date – Attendance date presented in numerical format, for
example,
04/19/10.
•
GradeLevels GradeLevelDescr
•
HomeRoom DistrictHRID
•
School SchoolName Att – Att is an extra description that refers to an attendance
record for any students associated with a specific school.
•
School SchoolName Student – Student is an extra description that refers to
attendance records for a specific student associated with a specific school.
•
School SchoolShortName Att – Att is an extra description that refers to an
attendance record for any students associated with a specific school.
•
School SchoolShortName Student – Student is an extra description that refers to
attendance records for a specific student associated with a specific school.
•
Sif StudentDailyAttendance DailyAttendanceCode AttendanceCodeInfoRefId –
GUID
•
Sif StudentDailyAttendance DailyAttendanceCode DailyAttendanceCode Text
•
Sif StudentDailyAttendance SIF ExtendedElement SIF ExtendedElement Text
Absence Level
•
Sif StudentDailyAttendance StudentDailyAttendance AttendanceNote
•
Sif StudentDailyAttendance StudentDailyAttendance Date
•
Sif StudentDailyAttendance StudentDailyAttendance SchoolInfoRefId – GUID
•
Sif StudentDailyAttendance StudentDailyAttendance StudentDailyAttendance Id
•
Sif StudentDailyAttendance StudentDailyAttendance StudentPersonalRefId –
GUID
•
Student DateOfBirth
•
Student DistrictStudentID
•
Student EnrollmentDate
•
Student EnrollmentStatusCd
•
Student FirstName
•
Student HomeSchoolId
•
Student LastName
•
Student MidName
•
Student Student DBID
6. Select one of the following options in the Operation list if it is available. The available
options may vary depending on the option you selected in the Field Name list.
•
Is Equal To
•
Is Not Equal To
•
Is Less Than
•
Is Less Than or Equal To
•
Is Greater Than
•
Is Greater Than or Equal To
•
Is Before
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
187
Reports
•
Is Before or On
•
Is After
•
Is After or On
•
Begins With
•
Does Not Begin With
•
Ends With
•
Does Not End With
•
Contains
•
Does Not Contain
•
Has a Value
•
Does Not Have a Value
7. Type the appropriate value in the Value field.
Note: For options in the Field Name list that end in “RefId,” you must enter the
GUID in the Value field in the same format as it is in the field in the table. If you
selected Has a Value or Does Not Have a Value in the Operation list, then the
Value field is not available.
Student Daily Attendance Integration Report
8. Specific selected columns indicated by a check mark display on the report by default. If
you have selected specific filter options in the Field Name list and you want that
information to display on the report, make sure to select the corresponding column name
in the Columns list.
9. Click View Report.
The report displays at the bottom of the window.
188
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Reports
Note: The field or list displays red indicating an unacceptable value was entered
or a required field was left blank.
10. To save the report with your selected parameters, filters and columns, click
Save
Setup As. On the Save Setup As window in the New report name field, type the unique
report name, and in the New description field, type the description of the report. Then,
click Save.
The following message displays at the bottom of the window, “Report setup saved
successfully.”
Student Demographics Report
The Student Demographics report provides numerous options for displaying student demographic
information for individual or multiple classes, class groups or homerooms. For example, you can
apply specific filter options to create a report that displays student addresses for specific classes
or schools. Once you save the report with your desired filter options, you can run it as often as you
like.
1. Enter the name of the report in the Report Header field.
Student Demographics displays by default, but you may change the name, if desired.
2. In the Set Required Parameters area, select the appropriate school(s) in the Schools list.
Note: Only the schools to which you have access display in the list.
Note: If there are no available choices from which to select, then No school
available displays with a red background.
Note: The field or list displays red indicating an unacceptable value was entered
or a required field was left blank.
3. In the Set Optional Filters area, select the appropriate option(s) in the Field Name list. See
“Student Demographics Report – Field Name Options” for descriptions of all the available
options.
4. Select one of the following options in the Operation list if it is available. The available
options may vary depending on the option you selected in the Field Name list.
•
Is Equal To
•
Is Not Equal To
•
Begins With
•
Does Not Begin With
•
Ends With
•
Does Not End With
•
Contains
•
Does Not Contain
•
Has A Value
•
Does Not Have A Value
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
189
Reports
5. Type the appropriate value in the Value field.
Note: The available options and acceptable values vary depending on the option
you selected in the Field Name list. You may be able to enter only alphabetical or
only numeric characters depending on the option you selected in the Field Name
list. If you selected an option in the Field Name list that ends in “Indicator,” then
you must select the Yes or No option in the Value field. If you selected an option
in the Field Name list that requires a date, a calendar becomes available in the
Value field. If you selected Has A Value or Does Not Have A Value in the
Operation list, then the Value field is not available.
6. Specific selected columns indicated by a check mark display on the report by default. If
you have selected specific filter options in the Field Name list and you want that
information to display on the report, make sure to select the corresponding column name
in the Columns list. Options in the Field Name list that end in “Indicator” do not have a
corresponding column to display.
7. Click
.
The report displays at the bottom of the window.
8. To save the report with your selected parameters, filters and columns, click
Save
Setup As. On the Save Setup As window in the New report name field, type the unique
report name, and in the New description field, type the description of the report. Then,
click Save.
The following message displays at the bottom of the window, “Report setup saved
successfully.”
Customizing the Student Demographics by Class Report
190
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Reports
Disabilities Report
Student Demographics Report – Field Name Options
Option
Description
Birth Date
Date of birth of the student.
Calendar Name
Calendar used by the school in which the student is enrolled.
Class Name
Name of the class in which the student is enrolled. If no class
name is assigned, then course name and section display.
Counselor Name
Name of the guidance counselor assigned to the student.
Disability Code
Code that represents a disability which is included in a list of
disabilities recognized by the state department of education.
These codes are also used in ProgressBook SpecialServices. If
you select this option, you must type 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 08,
09, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 or ** in the Value field.
Disability Name
Full name of a disability which is included in a list of disabilities
recognized by the state department of education. These codes
are also used in ProgressBook SpecialServices. If you select this
option, you must type the full or partial disability name in the
Value field.
Enrollment Date
Date on which the student enrolled in the school.
Enrollment Status Code
Code that represents whether the student is active or inactive in
the school in which the student is enrolled.
Gender Code
Code that represents whether a student is female or male.
Grade Level Code
Code that represents the grade level in which the student is
enrolled.
Grade Level Name
Name of the grade level in which the student is enrolled.
Graduation Date
Date on which the student will graduate from high school.
Home School ID
Code that represents the school building in which the student
was originally enrolled.
Homeroom ID
Code that identifies the homeroom to which the student is
assigned.
Indicates whether the student's information has been disabled on
the ParentAccess Web Site. If a parent account is associated
Parent Access Disabled Indicator with multiple student accounts, the parent account can still
access the other student accounts. If you select this option, you
must select Yes or No in the Value field.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
191
Reports
Student Demographics Report – Field Name Options
Option
Description
Parent Access Disabled Status
Name
Indicates whether the student's information has been disabled on
the ParentAccess Web Site. If you select this option, you must
type Disabled in the Value field.
PB School ID
ProgressBook GradeBook code that identifies the school in
which the student is enrolled.
PB Student ID
ProgressBook GradeBook code that identifies the student.
School Enrollment Status Name
Indicates whether the student's record is active in ProgressBook
GradeBook. If you select this option, you must type Active or
Withdrawn in the Value field.
School ID
Code that identifies the school in which the student is enrolled.
School Name
Name of the school in which the student is enrolled.
Student Address Line 1
Street address where the student lives.
Student Address Line 2
Street address where the student lives.
Student Address Line 3
Street address where the student lives.
Student Address Apt No
Apartment number where the student lives.
Student City
City where the student lives.
Student Email Address
Email address of the student.
Student First Name
First name of the student.
Student ID
District code that identifies the student.
Student Last Name
Last name of the student.
Student Middle Name
Middle name of the student.
Student Phone Number
Student's primary phone number.
Student State
State where the student lives.
Student Zip Code
Postal code of the address where the student lives.
Student's Last Parent Access
Login Date
Date of the last time the student logged in to the ParentAccess
Web Site.
Student Section Enrollment Integration Report
Users with master and school administrator privileges can use the Student Section Enrollment
Integration Report to troubleshoot data discrepancies between student and class records in the
Sif tables, located in the district database, and in ProgressBook tables, if the data exists. This
report is available to districts using any student information systems that use Sif tables in the batch
data integration process.
1. On the Administrator Home Page, select Student Section Enrollment in the Run a
Report list and then click Run.
2. On the ProgressBook Report Viewer window, enter the name of the report in the Report
Header field. Student Section Enrollment Integration Report displays by default but you
may change the name if desired.
3. In the Set Required Parameters area, select the appropriate school(s) in the Schools list.
Note: Only the schools to which you have access display in the list.
192
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Reports
Note: If there are no available choices from which to select, No school available
displays with a red background.
4. Select one of the following Include Null Schools options:
•
Yes – Include student or class records in the student information system that do not
have matching records in ProgressBook tables.
•
No – Do not include student or class records in the student information system that do
not have matching records in ProgressBook tables.
5. In the Set Optional Filters area, the options listed, with the exception of Teacher Names,
use the following naming convention: table name [space] field name. In the option Class
Class DBID, Class DBID refers to the field in the ProgressBook Class table. In the Sif
SectionEnrollment StudentSectionEnrollment EntryDate option, EntryDate refers to the
field in the Sif SectionEnrollment StudentSectionEnrollment table. Select any of the
appropriate options in the Field Name list.
•
Class Class DBID
•
Class DistrictClassID
•
Class SectionDescr
•
Course CourseName
•
Course DistrictCourseID
•
GradeLevels GradeLevelDescr
•
HomeRoom DistrictHRID
•
School SchoolName Class
•
School SchoolName Student
•
School SchoolShortName Class
•
School SchoolShortName Student
•
Sif SectionEnrollment StudentSectionEnrollment EntryDate
•
Sif SectionEnrollment StudentSectionEnrollment ExitDate
•
Sif SectionEnrollment StudentSectionEnrollment RefId – GUID
•
Sif SectionEnrollment StudentSectionEnrollment SectionInfoRefId – GUID
•
Sif SectionEnrollment StudentSectionEnrollment StudentPersonalRefId – GUID
•
Sif SectionEnrollment StudentSectionEnrollment StudentSectionEnrollmentId
•
Student DateOfBirth
•
Student DistrictStudentID
•
Student EnrollmentDate
•
Student EnrollmentStatusCd
•
Student FirstName
•
Student HomeSchoolId
•
Student LastName
•
Student MidName
•
Student Student DBID
•
Teacher Names
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
193
Reports
6. Select one of the following options in the Operation list if it is available. The available
options may vary depending on the option you selected in the Field Name list.
•
Is Equal To
•
Is Not Equal To
•
Is Less Than
•
Is Less Than or Equal To
•
Is Greater Than
•
Is Greater Than or Equal To
•
Is Before
•
Is Before or On
•
Is After
•
Is After or On
•
Begins With
•
Does Not Begin With
•
Ends With
•
Does Not End With
•
Contains
•
Does Not Contain
•
Has a Value
•
Does Not Have a Value
7. Type the appropriate value in the Value field.
Note: For options in the Field Name list that end in “RefId,” you must enter the
GUID in the Value field in the same format as it is in the field in the table. If you
selected Has a Value or Does Not Have a Value in the Operation list, then the
Value field is not available.
194
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Reports
Student Section Enrollment Integration Report
8. Specific selected columns indicated by a check mark display on the report by default. If
you have selected specific filter options in the Field Name list and you want that
information to display on the report, make sure to select the corresponding column name
in the Columns list.
9. Click View Report.
The report displays at the bottom of the window.
Note: The field or list displays red indicating an unacceptable value was entered
or a required field was left blank.
10. To save the report with your selected parameters, filters and columns, click
Save
Setup As. On the Save Setup As window in the New report name field, type the unique
report name, and in the New description field, type the description of the report. Then,
click Save.
The following message displays at the bottom of the window, “Report setup saved
successfully.”
YTD (Year-to-Date) Final Grade Admin Report
The YTD (Year-to-Date) Final Grade Admin Report provides numerous options for displaying year
to date grade information for students in individual or multiple teachers’ classes or class groups.
This report is available to users with master, school administrator, school support and principal
privileges. Users logged in with School Support privileges, must access the report from the
Principal Home Page. The YTD Final Grade Report can only be used on classes where the YTD
Grade calculation has been enabled on the report card for the class. This report cannot be used
on classes using standards-based grading.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
195
Reports
1. On the Administrator Home Page, select YTD Final Grade Admin in the Run a Report list
and then click Run.
2. On the ProgressBook Report Viewer window, enter the name of the report in the Report
Header field. YTD Final Grade Admin displays by default, but you may change the name
if desired.
3. In the Select Required Parameters area, select the appropriate teacher(s) in the
Teacher(s) list.
Note: For users logged in with school administrator, school support or principal
privileges, only the teachers in the school buildings to which you have access
display in the list. For users logged in with master privileges, all the teachers in all
the school buildings display.
Note: If there are no available choices in which to select, then No teacher
available displays with a red background.
4. In the Set Optional Filters area, select any of the appropriate option(s) in the Field Name
list. See “YTD (Year to Date) Final Grade Admin Report” for descriptions of all the
available options.
5. Select one of the following options in the Operation list if it is available. The available
options may vary depending on the option you selected in the Field Name list.
•
Is Equal To
•
Is Not Equal To
•
Is Before
•
Is Before or On
•
Is After
•
Is After or On
•
Is Less Than
•
Is Less Than or Equal To
•
Is Greater Than
•
Is Greater Than or Equal To
•
Begins With
•
Does Not Begin With
•
Ends With
•
Does Not End With
•
Contains
•
Does Not Contain
•
Has A Value
•
Does Not Have A Value
6. Type the appropriate value in the Value field.
196
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Reports
Note: The available options and acceptable values vary depending on the option
you selected in the Field Name list. If you selected an option in the Field Name list
that requires a date, then a calendar becomes available in the Value field. If you
selected Has a Value or Does Not Have a Value in the Operation list, then the
Value field is not available.
7. Specific selected columns indicated by a check mark display on the report by default. If
you have selected specific filter options in the Field Name list and you want that
information to display on the report, make sure to select the corresponding column name
in the Columns list.
8. Click View Report.
The report displays at the bottom of the window.
Note: The field or list displays red indicating an unacceptable value was entered
or a required field was left blank.
9. To save the report with your selected parameters, filters and columns, click
Save
Setup As. On the Save Setup As window in the New report name field, type the unique
report name, and in the New description field, type the description of the report. Then,
click Save.
The following message displays at the bottom of the window, “Report setup saved
successfully.”
YTD Final Grade Admin Report
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
197
Reports
YTD (Year to Date) Final Grade Admin Report
Options
198
Description
Average Mark
Student’s grade for the reporting period. Depending on how the
year to date grade calculation is set up in the report card, the
grades display differently. If the year to date grade calculation is
based on a system calculation that uses grades from the report
card, then the grade is the grade entered on the Report Card
Entry screen. If the year to date grade calculation is based on a
system calculation that uses averages from the grade book, then
the grade is the numeric average from the teacher’s grade book.
Birth Date
Date of birth of the student.
District Student ID
District code that identifies the student.
Enrollment Status Code
Code that represents whether the student is active or inactive in
the school in which the student is enrolled.
Gender Code
Code that represents whether a student is female or male.
Grade Level
Grade level in which the student is enrolled.
Grading Scale
Grading scale selected on the Grading Scale Setup screen.
Report Card Name
Report card being used in the class.
Reporting Period Short Name
Short name of the reporting period as specified on the Reporting
Periods screen and used in the Grading Period list on the Class
Dashboard and Report Card Entry screen.
School ID
Code that identifies the school in which the student is enrolled.
School Name
Name of the school in which the student is enrolled.
Student Email Address
Email address of the student.
Student Name
Full name of the student.
Teacher Name
Full name of the primary teacher associated with the class.
Year To Date
Student’s class grade if final report cards were given at the current time. Depending on the marks used in the grading scale
used in the report card, the grades display as percentage averages or point values and its mark equivalent.
Year To Date Value
Numeric point value equivalent of the student’s class grade if final
report cards were given at the current time. Depending on how
the year to date grade calculation is set up in the report card, the
grades display differently. If the final grade is based on numeric
averages, then the grade is a percentage average. If the final
grade is based on letter grades, then the grade is a point value
equivalent of the letter grade.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim
Templates
The following sections in this appendix list the template pieces available for use in each report
card/interim template option accompanied by a representation of the template piece.
ProgressBook GradeBook provides several template options and hundreds of template pieces for
you to use in creating your customized report cards/interims. When you select one of the template
size and layout options listed as follows on the General Tab, the template pieces available to use
in the layout of your printed report card/interim display on the Templates tab:
•
Standard Elementary Report Card (8 1/2 x 11 portrait), see “Standard Elementary Report
Card (8 1/2 x 11 portrait)” .
•
Standard Elementary Report Card (8 1/2 x 14 portrait), see “Standard Elementary Report
Card (8 1/2x14 portrait)” .
•
Standard Elementary Report Card (8 1/2 x 11 landscape, 2 columns), see “Standard
Elementary Report Card (8 1/2x11 landscape, 2 columns)” .
•
Standard Elementary Report Card (Legal tri-fold), see “Standard Elementary Report Card
(Legal tri-fold)” .
•
Standard Elementary Report Card (11 x 17 landscape, 2 columns), see “Standard
Elementary Report Card (11x17 landscape, 2 columns)” .
Standard Elementary Report Card (8 1/2 x 11 portrait)
Attendance template pieces displays attendance totals for grading periods. The following
attendance template pieces are available.
Attendance (½ Width, Present, Tardy, Absent)
Attendance (3 Columns, ½ Width, Abs, Tar)
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
199
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Attendance (4 Columns - Half Width)
Attendance (5 Columns, ½ w, Pres, Poss, ExAT, UnExAT)
Attendance (5 Column ½ width, Abs, Tar)
Attendance (5 Column, ½ width, Pres, Abs, Tar)
Blank Line template piece inserts a blank line of space. Using this template piece is the same as
specifying 1 in the Rows After column on the Template tab.
Class Comments template pieces display comments about an individual class for the current and
multiple grading periods. Use this template piece paired with a marks template piece and then
map both pieces to the same course to display the comments with the course marks. The following
class comments template pieces are available.
200
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Class Comments (Current Per, 1/2 Width,
2 Rows)
Class Comments (Current Per, 1/2 Width,
4 Rows)
Class Comments (Current Per, 1/2 Width,
6 Rows)
Class Comments (Current Per, 1/2 Width,
12 Rows)
Class Comments (Current Per, Full Width, 2 Rows)
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
201
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Class Comments (Current Per, Full Width, 4 Rows)
Class Comments (Current Per, Full Width, 8 Rows)
Class Comments (Q1-Q4, 1/2 Width,
2 Rows)
Class Comments (Q1-Q4, 1/2 Width, 4 Rows)
202
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Class Comments (Q1-Q4, Full Width, 2 Rows)
Class Comments (Q1-Q4, Full Width, 4 rows)
Class Comments (T1-T3 Full Width, 2 Rows)
Class Comments (T1-T3 Full Width, 4 Rows)
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
203
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Column Break template piece inserts a break between columns.
Current Date template piece displays the current date.
Current Date
File Header template pieces inserts invisible page-size formatting codes. This template piece
MUST be the first template piece in the template.
Geometric Shapes template piece displays marks for recognizing geometric shapes.
Geometric Shapes
Grading Period is template piece typically used for interims that displays the grading period
selected on the Generate Report Cards screen.
Grading Period
Index template pieces display an explanation of marks used on the report card based on the
marks selected on the Assessments tab and descriptions in the Mark Types setup. The amount
of text that displays in each column cannot be adjusted. Use this template piece paired with text
entered in the Additional Mark Explanation Message field on the Messages tab.
204
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Index
Interim Comments Header provides the heading row for the Interim with 1 Comment and the
Interim with 2 Comments template pieces. This template piece is typically used on traditional
interims.
Interim Comments Header
Interim Mark & Comment Header provides the heading row for the Interim Mark & Comment
template piece. This template piece is typically used for traditional interims.
Interim Mark & Comment Header
Interim Mark & Comment is a template piece for traditional interims that displays each course,
its mark and one comment. Only marks for the current grading period appear on the generated
interim. When using this template piece, on the Assessments tab, make sure the mark is the first
assessment and the comment is the second assessment. If the comment is chosen from a list, the
mark type must be Combined Comment so that the comment text prints instead of the code.
Additionally, you must use the Interim Mark & Comment Header template piece for the heading
row with the this template piece.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
205
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Interim Mark & Comment
Interim with 1 Comment and Interim with 2 Comments are template pieces for traditional
interims that display each course and one or two comments. Only comments for the current
grading period appear on the generated interim. If the comments are chosen from a list, the mark
type must be Combined Comment so that the comment text prints instead of the code.
Additionally, you must use the Interim Comments Header template piece for the heading row
with either of these template pieces.
Interim with 1 Comment
Interim with 2 Comments
Interim with Current Per Assessments (1/2 width) and Interim with Current Per
Assessments (Full Width) are template pieces for standards-based interims that display the
assessments and mark for each course. Only the marks for the current grading period appear on
the generated interim. The difference between the two template pieces is their width on the
generated interim.
Interim with Current Per Assessments
(1/2 width)
Interim with Current Per Assessments (Full Width)
Kindergarten Letters template pieces display marks for recognizing lower and upper case letters
and the letter sound. The following kindergarten letters template pieces are available.
206
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Custom Kindergarten Letter Box - Full Width
Custom K Letter Box (Upper, Lower, Sound)
Letter Recognition template pieces display marks for recognizing upper and lower case letters
by grading period. The following letter recognition template pieces are available.
Letter_LowerCase_4RepPer
Letter_UpperCase_4RepPer
Letter_UpperCase2_4RepPer is used specifically for sounds.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
207
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Letter_UpperCase2_4RepPer
Note: When using letter or word template pieces, you must set up the letters
and/or words as assessments in the course on the Assessments tab. Make sure
to use the Checkmark for Report Cards mark type.
Mailing Label template piece displays the student’s mailing address.
Mailing Label
Marks template pieces display grades and/or marks for assessments by subject. The following
marks template pieces are available.
Marks (2 Columns)
Marks (3 Columns)
Marks (3 Columns, 1/2 Width)
Marks (4 Columns)
208
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Marks (4 Columns, 1/2 Width)
Marks (5 Columns)
Marks (5 columns, 1/2 Width)
Marks (6 Columns)
Marks (7 Columns)
Custom Marks S1 and Custom Marks S2 template pieces are specifically designed for districts
whose report cards only show the grades for a single semester. Custom Marks S1 displays the
marks and comments for the first semester; Custom Marks S2, the marks and comments for the
second semester. To use these templates, the following setup is required:
•
Create two report cards: one for the first semester using the Custom Marks S1 template
piece and one for the second semester using the Custom Marks S2 template piece.
•
For each report card, create two assessments on the Assessment tab: one for the mark
and one for comments. These are the only valid assessments you can use for this
template piece.
•
For each report card, map the identifiers to the correct assessment on the Mapping tab.
Custom Marks S1
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
209
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Custom Marks S2
Messages template pieces display custom message text entered on the Messages tab. Message
X (1 through 12) options are available and all display the text entered in the Messages fields in
two size formats: half-page and full-page widths. Each option is available with and without
borders. Text entered in the Additional Mark Explanation Message field displays with the Index
template piece. Each message field allows up to 6,000 characters of text.
Message 1 (1/2 Width & Border)
Message 1 (Half Width)
Message 1 (Page Width & Border)
Message 1 (Page Width)
One Column Section template piece inserts a one-column section on a page that uses a
two-column format.
Page Break template piece inserts a page break between multiple pages of a report card
indicating the end of one student’s report card. This template piece must be the last sequence
number in the list of template pieces.
Parent Signature template pieces display the possible combination of the student’s name, the
text “Parent Signature” and a blank line, and the text “Conference Requested? Yes No.” The
following parent signature template pieces are available.
Parent Signature Line
210
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Parent Signature Section (Full Width)
Placement Status template pieces display promotion or placement to a succeeding grade or
retention in the current grade. The following placement status template pieces are available.
End of Year Placement
End of Year Placement (Full Width)
End of Year Placement (Promoted, Placed, Retained)
End of Yr Place (Pro, Pla, Ret, Exp) 1/2 Width
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
211
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
End of Year Placement (Assigned, Retained)
Principal Signature template piece displays the principal’s name and blank line for signature.
Principal Signature Line
School Header template piece displays the school district name, the name of the school and the
report card title on separate lines centered in the column or on the page. The school district name
that displays in this template piece was entered on the District Setup screen. The name of the
school was entered on the Schools Setup screen. The report card title was entered in the Report
Card Title field on the Messages tab. If you do not enter any text in the Report Card Title field on
the Messages tab, a title does not display when using the School Header template piece.
School Header (District, School & Title)
Student Header template piece displays the student’s name and grade, teacher’s name and
school year, and principal’s name.
Student Header with Principal
Student Header (Without Principal)
Teacher & Principal Signatures template piece displays the teacher, date and principal.
Teacher & Principal Signatures
212
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Teacher Comments template piece displays a teacher’s comments for each grading period.
These comments are not associated with individual subjects. The following teacher comment
template pieces are available.
Teacher Comments (1/2 Page)
Teacher Comments (1/2 Page, Semester 1 & 2)
The size of this template piece expands based on the amount of text entered.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
213
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Teacher Comments (Curr Per, Full Width, No Border)
Teacher Comments (Curr Per, 1/2 Width)
214
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Teacher Comments (Full Page)
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
215
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Teacher Comments (Full Width)
Teacher Comments (Trimester, Full Width)
Two Column Section template piece inserts a two-column section on a page that uses a
one-column format.
Standard Elementary Report Card (8 1/2x14 portrait)
Attendance template pieces displays attendance totals for grading periods. The following
attendance template pieces are available.
Attendance (½ Width, Present, Tardy, Absent)
216
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Attendance (3 Columns, ½ Width, Abs, Tar)
Attendance (4 Columns - Half Width)
Attendance (5 Columns, ½ w, Pres, Poss, ExAT,
UnExAT)
Attendance (5 Column ½ Width, Abs, Tar)
Attendance (5 Column, ½ Width, Pres, Abs, Tar)
Blank Line template piece inserts a blank line of space. Using this template piece is the same as
specifying 1 in the Rows After column on the Template tab.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
217
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Class Comments template pieces display comments about an individual class for the current and
multiple grading periods. Use this template piece paired with a marks template piece and then
map both pieces to the same course to display the comments with the course marks. The following
class comments template pieces are available.
Class Comments (Current Per, 1/2 Width, 2 Rows)
Class Comments (Current Per, 1/2 Width, 4 Rows)
Class Comments (Current Per, 1/2 Width, 6 Rows)
Class Comments (Current Per, 1/2 Width,
12 Rows)
Class Comments (Current Per, Full Width, 2 Rows)
218
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Class Comments (Current Per, Full Width, 4 Rows)
Class Comments (Current Per, Full Width, 8 Rows)
Class Comments (Q1-Q4, 1/2 Width, 2 Rows)
Class Comments (Q1-Q4, 1/2 Width, 4 Rows)
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
219
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Class Comments (Q1-Q4, Full Width, 2 Rows)
Class Comments (Q1-Q4, Full Width, 4 Rows)
Class Comments (T1-T3 Full Width, 2 Rows)
Class Comments (T1-T3 Full Width, 4 Rows)
Column Break template piece inserts a break between columns.
220
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
File Header template piece inserts invisible page-size formatting codes. This template piece
MUST be the first template piece in the template.
Geometric Shapes template piece displays marks for recognizing geometric shapes.
Geometric Shapes
Grading Period is a template piece typically used for interims that displays the grading period
selected on the Generate Report Cards screen.
Grading Period
Interim Comments Header provides the heading row for the Interim with 1 Comment and the
Interim with 2 Comments template pieces. This template piece is typically used on traditional
interims.
Interim Comments Header
Interim Mark & Comment Header provides the heading row for the Interim Mark & Comment
template piece. This template piece is typically used for traditional interims.
Interim Mark & Comment Header
Interim Mark & Comment is a template piece for traditional interims that displays each course,
its mark and one comment. Only marks for the current grading period appear on the generated
interim. When using this template piece, on the Assessments tab, make sure the mark is the first
assessment and the comment is the second assessment. If the comment is chosen from a list, the
mark type must be Combined Comment so that the comment text prints instead of the code.
Additionally, you must use the Interim Mark & Comment Header template piece for the heading
row with this template piece.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
221
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Interim Mark & Comment
Interim with 1 Comment and Interim with 2 Comments are template pieces for traditional
interims that display each course and one or two comments. Only comments for the current
grading period appear on the generated interim. If the comments are chosen from a list, the mark
type must be Combined Comment so that the comment text prints instead of the code.
Additionally, you must use the Interim Comments Header template piece for the heading row
with either of these template pieces.
Interim with 1 Comment
Interim with 2 Comments
Interim with Current Per Assessments (1/2 width) and Interim with Current Per
Assessments (Full Width) are template pieces for standards-based interims that display the
assessments and mark for each course. Only the marks for the current grading period appear on
the generated interim. The difference between the two template pieces is their width on the
generated interim.
Interim with Current Per Assessments
(1/2 Width)
Interim with Current Per Assessments (Full Width)
Index template piece displays an explanation of marks used on the report card based on the
marks selected on the Assessments tab and descriptions in the Mark Types setup. The amount
of text that displays in each column cannot be adjusted. Use this template piece paired with text
entered in the Additional Mark Explanation Message field on the Messages tab.
222
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Index
Kindergarten Letters template piece displays marks for recognizing lower and upper case letters
and the letter sound in a one-column width format. The following kindergarten letters template
pieces are available.
Custom Kindergarten Letter Box - Full Width
Custom K Letter Box (Upper, Lower, Sound)
Letter Recognition template pieces display marks for recognizing upper and lower case letters
by grading period. The following letter recognition template pieces are available.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
223
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Letter_LowerCase_4RepPer
Letter_UpperCase_4RepPer
Letter_UpperCase2_4RepPer is used specifically for sounds.
Letter_UpperCase2_4RepPer
Note: When using letter or word template pieces, you must set up the letters
and/or words as assessments in the course on the Assessments tab. Make sure
to use the Checkmark for Report Cards mark type.
Marks template pieces display grades and/or marks for assessments by subject. The following
marks template pieces are available.
Marks (2 Columns)
224
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Marks (3 Columns)
Marks (3 Columns, 1/2 Width)
Marks (4 Columns)
Marks (4 Columns, 1/2 Width)
Marks (5 Columns)
Marks (5 Columns, 1/2 Width)
Marks (6 Columns)
Marks (7 Columns)
Messages template pieces display custom message text entered on the Messages tab. Message
X (1 through 12) options are available and all display the text entered in the Messages fields in
two size formats: half-page and full-page widths. Each option is available with and without
borders. Text entered in the Additional Mark Explanation Message field displays with the Index
template piece. Each message field allows up to 6,000 characters of text.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
225
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Message 1 (1/2 Width & Border)
Message 1 (Half Width)
Message 1 (Page Width & Border)
Message 1 (Page Width)
One Column Section template piece inserts a one-column section on a page that uses a
two-column format.
Page Break template piece inserts a page break between multiple pages of a report card
indicating the end of one student’s report card. This template piece must be the last sequence
number in the list of template pieces.
Parent Signature template pieces displays the possible combination of the student’s name, the
text “Parent Signature” and a blank line, and the text “Conference Requested? Yes No.” The
following parent signature template pieces are available.
Parent Signature Line
Parent Signature Section (Full Width)
Placement Status template pieces display promotion or placement to a succeeding grade or
retention in the current grade. The following placement status template pieces are available.
226
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
End of Year Placement
End of Year Placement (Assigned, Retained)
End of Year Placement (Promoted, Placed, Retained)
End of Yr Place (Pro, Pla, Ret, Exp) - 1/2 Width
Principal Signature template piece displays the principal’s name and blank line for signature.
Principal Signature Line
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
227
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
School Header template piece displays the report card title, the school district name and the
name of the school on separate lines centered in the column or on the page. The school district
name that displays in this template piece was entered on the District Setup screen. The name of
the school was entered on the Schools Setup screen. The report card title was entered in the
Report Card Title field on the Messages tab. If you do not enter any text in the Report Card Title
field on the Messages tab, a title does not display when using the School Header template piece.
School Header (District, School &
Title)
Student Header template piece displays the student’s name and grade, teacher’s name and
school year, and principal’s name. The following student header template pieces are available.
Student Header with Principal
Student Header with Principal & Border
Teacher Comments template pieces display a teacher’s comments for each grading period.
These comments are not associated with individual subjects. The following teacher comments
template pieces are available.
228
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Teacher Comments (1/2 Page)
Teacher Comments (1/2 Page, Semester 1 & 2)
The size of this template piece expands based on the amount of text entered.
Teacher Comments (Curr Per, Full Width, No Border)
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
229
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Teacher Comments (Curr Per, 1/2 Width)
Teacher Comments (Full Page)
230
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Teacher Comments (Full Width)
Teacher Comments (Trimester, Full Width)
Two Column Section template piece inserts a two-column section on a page that uses a
one-column format.
Standard Elementary Report Card (8 1/2x11 landscape,
2 columns)
Attendance template pieces displays attendance totals for grading periods. The following
attendance template pieces are available.
Attendance (4 Columns)
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
231
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Attendance (4 Columns with Days Present)
Attendance (5 Columns)
Attendance (5 Columns with Days Present)
Attendance (5 Col, Pre, Poss, ExcAT, UnExcAT)
Blank Line template piece inserts a blank line of space. Using this template piece is the same as
specifying 1 in the Rows After column on the Template tab.
Class Comments template pieces display comments about an individual class for the current
grading period. Use this template piece paired with a marks template piece and then map both
pieces to the same course to display the comments with the course marks. The following class
comments template pieces are available.
Class Comments (Current Period, 2 Rows)
232
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Class Comments (Current Period, 4 Rows)
Class Comments (Current Period, 6 Rows)
Class Comments (Current Period, 12 Rows)
Class Comments (Q1-Q4, 2 Rows)
Column Break template piece inserts a break between columns.
File Header template piece inserts invisible page-size formatting codes. This template piece
MUST be the first template piece in the template.
Index template piece displays an explanation of marks used on the report card based on the
marks selected on the Assessments tab and descriptions in the Mark Types setup. The amount
of text that displays in each column cannot be adjusted. Use this template piece paired with text
entered in the Additional Mark Explanation Message field on the Messages tab.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
233
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Index
Kindergarten Letters template piece displays the possible combination of marks for recognizing
lower and upper case letters, letter sounds and consonants. The following kindergarten letters
template pieces are available.
Custom K Letter Box (Upper, Lower, Sound)
Custom Kindergarten Letters (BA)
234
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Kindergarten Letters 2
Kindergarten Note about Art, Music, etc. template piece displays a message about Art, Music,
and/or Physical Education classes.
Custom BA Kindergarten Note About Art, Music, etc.
Kindergarten Word Recognition template piece displays marks for recognizing words by sight.
The following kindergarten word template pieces are available.
Custom BA Kindergarten Sight Words
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
235
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Custom BA Kindergarten Sight Words - (2007)
Letter Recognition template pieces display marks for recognizing upper and lower case letters
by grading period. The following letter recognition template pieces are available.
Kindergarten Consonants
Letter_LowerCase_4RepPer
Letter_UpperCase_4RepPer
Letter_UpperCase2_4RepPer is used specifically for sounds.
236
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Letter_UpperCase2_4RepPer
Note: When using letter or word template pieces, you must set up the letters
and/or words as assessments in the course on the Assessments tab. Make sure
to use the Checkmark for Report Cards mark type.
Marks template pieces display grades and/or marks for assessments by subject. The following
marks template pieces are available.
Marks (2 Columns)
Marks (3 Columns)
Marks (4 column - no wrapping) does not allow more than one line of text in the Assessment area.
Marks (4 Column - No Wrapping)
Marks (4 column - no wrapping, with shading) does not allow more than one line of text in the
Assessment area and applies shading to the grading periods that are not used on the report card.
Marks (4 Column - No Wrapping, with Shading)
Marks (4 Columns)
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
237
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Marks (5 Columns)
Marks (6 Columns)
Marks (7 Columns)
Marks (Kindergarten)
Marks Explanation template pieces display an explanation of marks used on the report card. The
following marks explanation template pieces are available.
Custom BA Kindergarten Key
Key - Kindergarten
238
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Messages template pieces displays custom message text entered on the Messages tab.
Message X (1 through 12) options are available and all display in the same layout format: 1/2 page
width with and without borders. Text entered in the Additional Mark Explanation Message field
displays with the Index template piece.
Message 1
Message 1 (with Border)
Page Break template piece inserts a page break between multiple pages of a report card
indicating the end of one student’s report card. This template piece MUST be the last sequence
number in the list of template pieces.
Parent Comments (1/2 Page) template piece displays an area for parents to submit hand-written
comments.
Parent Comments (1/2 Page)
Parent Signature Line template piece displays the text “Parent Signature” with a blank line for
the signature.
Parent Signature Line
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
239
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Placement Status template piece displays promotion or placement to a succeeding grade or
retention in the current grade. The following placement status template pieces are available.
End of Year Placement
End of Year Placement (Promoted, Placed, Retained)
End of Year Placement (Assigned, Retained)
End of Year Placement - Kindergarten
Principal Signature template piece displays the principal’s name or possibly a blank line for the
principal’s signature. The following principal signature template pieces are available.
Principal Signature (with name)
Principal Signature Line
240
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
School Header template piece displays the report card title, the school district name and the
name of the school on separate lines centered in the column or on the page. The school district
name that displays in this template piece was entered on the District Setup screen. The name of
the school was entered on the Schools Setup screen. The title was entered in the Report Card
Title field on the Messages tab. If you do not enter any text in the Report Card Title field on the
Messages tab, a title does not display when using the School Header template piece.
School Header (Title, District & School)
Student Header template piece displays the possible combination of student’s name, grade,
teacher’s name, school year and principal’s name. The following student header template pieces
are available.
Student Header (No Principal)
Student Header - Kindergarten
Student Header with Principal
Teacher Comments template pieces display a teacher’s comments for each grading period.
These comments are not associated with individual subjects. The following teacher comments
template pieces are available.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
241
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Teacher Comments (1/2 Page)
242
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Teacher Comments (Full Page)
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
243
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Teacher Comments - Kindergarten
244
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Standard Elementary Report Card (Legal tri-fold)
Attendance template pieces displays attendance totals for grading periods. The following
attendance template pieces are available.
Attendance (3 Column 1/3 Width)
Attendance (4 Column with Days Present)
Attendance (4 Column)
Attendance (5 Col, Pres, Poss, ExAT, UnExAT)
Attendance (5 Column with Days Present)
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
245
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Attendance (5 Column)
AttendanceAtConference_Fall_Spring template piece displays an indication of the teacher’s
desire for the parent to attend the Fall or Spring conference.
AttendanceAtConference_Fall_Spring
Blank Line template piece inserts a blank line of space. Using this template piece is the same as
specifying 1 in the Rows After column on the Template tab.
Column Break template piece inserts a break between columns.
Class Comments template pieces display comments about an individual class in the current and
multiple grading periods. Use this template piece paired with a marks template piece and then
map both pieces to the same course to display the comments with the course marks. The following
class comments template pieces are available.
Course Comment (Current Period, 2 Lines)
Course Comment (Current Period, 4 Lines)
Course Comment (Current Period, 7 Lines)
246
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Course Comment (Current Period, 14 lines)
Course Comment (Q1-Q4)
Course Comment (Q2 & Q4, 2 Lines)
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
247
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Course Comment (Q2 & Q4, 3 Lines)
Continuums template pieces displays grade levels as a benchmark on a grading continuum. The
following continuums template pieces are available.
Custom Reading and Writing Continuums
Custom Writing Continuum
File Header template piece inserts invisible page-size formatting codes. This template piece
MUST be the first template piece in the template.
Index template piece displays an explanation of marks used on the report card based on the
marks selected on the Assessments tab and descriptions in the Mark Types setup. The amount
of text that displays in each column cannot be adjusted. Use this template piece paired with text
entered in the Additional Mark Explanation Message field on the Messages tab.
248
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Index
Intervention Participation template pieces display participation in tutoring or intervention
services for proficiency tests or Title I programs. The following intervention participation template
pieces are available.
Proficiency Test Intervention
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
249
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Participation_RRecovery_TitleIR_Quest
Kindergarten Letters template pieces display marks for recognizing lower and upper case letters
and the letter sound. The following kindergarten letters template pieces are available.
Custom K Letter Box (Upper, Lower, Sound)
Custom Kindergarten Letter Box
Kindergarten Words template piece displays marks for recognizing frequently used words.
Custom Kindergarten Word List
Letter Recognition template pieces displays marks for recognizing upper and lower case letters
by grading period. The following letter recognition template pieces are available.
250
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Letter_LowerCase_4RepPer
Letter_UpperCase_4RepPer
Letter_UpperCase2_4RepPer is used specifically for sounds.
Letter_UpperCase2_4RepPer
Note: When using letter or word template pieces, you must set up the letters
and/or words as assessments in the course on the Assessments tab. Make sure
to use the Checkmark for Report Cards mark type.
Marks template pieces display grades and/or marks for assessments by subject. The following
marks template pieces are available.
Marks (2 col, 1/3 Width)
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
251
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Marks (3 Column, 1/3 Width)
Marks (4 Column, 1/3 Width)
Marks (5 Column, 1/3 Width)
Marks (5 Column, 1/3 Width, Fixed Height)
Marks (6 Column, 1/3 Width)
Marks (7 Columns)
Messages template pieces display custom message text entered on the Messages tab. Message
X (1 through 9) options are available and all display the text entered in the Messages fields in
full-page width with and without borders. Message X (10 through 12) display the text entered in
the Messages fields in full-page width without borders. Text entered in the Additional Mark
Explanation Message field displays with the Index template piece. Each message field allows up
to 6,000 characters of text.
Message 1 (No Border)
Message 1 (with a Border)
252
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Page Break template piece inserts a page break between multiple pages of a report card
indicating the end of one student’s report card. This template piece MUST be the last sequence
number in the list of template pieces.
Parent Signature Line template piece displays the text “Parent Signature” and a blank line for
the signature.
Parent Signature Line
Parent Comments template piece displays an area for parents to submit hand-written comments.
Parent’s Comments
Placement Status template pieces displays promotion or placement to a succeeding grade or
retention in the current grade. The following placement status template pieces are available.
End of Year Placement
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
253
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
End of Year Placement (Assigned, Retained)
End of Year Placement (Promoted, Placed,
Retained)
End of Year Placement - Kindergarten
End of Year Placement - Version 2
Promoted_Placed_Retained
Principal Signature template pieces display the principal’s name or possibly a blank line for the
principal’s signature. The following principal signature template pieces are available.
Principal Signature Line
254
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Principal Signature with Name
Reading Progress template piece displays marks for reading progress.
ReadingProgress_Above_At_Below
School Header template piece displays the report card title, the school district name and the
name of the school on separate lines centered in the column or on the page. The school district
name that displays in this template piece was entered on the District Setup screen. The name of
the school was entered on the Schools Setup screen. The title was entered in the Report Card
Title field on the Messages tab. If you do not enter any text in the Report Card Title field on the
Messages tab, a title does not display when using the School Header template piece.
School Header (Title, District &
School)
Student Header template pieces display the possible combination of the student’s name, grade,
teacher’s name, school year and principal’s name. The following student header template pieces
are available.
Student Header
Student Header with Principal
Teacher Comments template pieces display teacher’s comments. These comments are not
associated with individual subjects. The following teacher comments template pieces are
available.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
255
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Teacher Comments (Full Page Length)
256
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Teacher Comments (Half Page Length)
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
257
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Teacher Comments Trimester (Full Page)
Standard Elementary Report Card (11x17 landscape,
2 columns)
Attendance template pieces displays attendance totals for grading periods. The following
attendance template pieces are available.
Attendance (½ width, Present, Tardy, Absent)
258
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Attendance (3 Columns, ½ Width, Abs, Tar)
Attendance (4 Columns - Half Width)
Attendance (5 Columns, ½ w, Pres, Poss, ExAT,
UnExAT)
Attendance (5 Column ½ Width, Abs, Tar)
Attendance (5 Column, ½ Width, Pres, Abs, Tar)
Blank Line template piece inserts a blank line of space. Using this template piece is the same as
specifying 1 in the Rows After column on the Template tab.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
259
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Class Comments template pieces display comments about an individual class in the current and
multiple grading periods. Use this template piece paired with a marks template piece and then
map both pieces to the same course to display the comments with the course marks. The following
class comments template pieces are available.
Class Comments (Current Per, 1/2 Width, 2 Rows)
Class Comments (Current Per, 1/2 Width, 4 Rows)
Class Comments (Current Per, 1/2 Width, 6 Rows)
Class Comments (Current Per, 1/2 Width,
12 Rows)
Class Comments (Current Per, Full Width, 2 Rows)
260
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Class Comments (Current Per, Full Width, 4 Rows)
Class Comments (Current Per, Full Width, 8 Rows)
Class Comments (Q1-Q4, 1/2 Width, 2 Rows)
Class Comments (Q1-Q4, 1/2 Width, 4 Rows)
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
261
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Class Comments (Q1-Q4, Full Width, 2 Rows)
Class Comments (T1-T3, Full Width, 2 Rows)
Class Comments (T1-T3, Full Width, 4 Rows)
Column Break template piece inserts a break between columns.
Current Date template piece displays the current date.
Current Date
File Header template piece inserts invisible page-size formatting codes. This template piece
MUST be the first template piece in the template.
Geometric Shapes template piece displays marks for recognizing geometric shapes.
262
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Geometric Shapes
Index template piece displays an explanation of marks used on the report card based on the
marks selected on the Assessments tab and descriptions in the Mark Types setup. The amount
of text that displays in each column cannot be adjusted. Use this template piece paired with text
entered in the Additional Mark Explanation Message field on the Messages tab.
Index
Kindergarten Letters template piece displays marks for recognizing lower and upper case letters
and letter sounds. The following kindergarten letters template pieces are available.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
263
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Custom Kindergarten Letter Box - Full Width
Custom K Letter Box (Upper, Lower, Sound)
Letter Recognition template pieces display marks for recognizing upper and lower case letters
by grading period. The following letter recognition template pieces are available.
Letter_LowerCase_4RepPer
Letter_UpperCase_4RepPer
Letter_UpperCase2_4RepPer is used specifically for sounds.
264
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Letter_UpperCase2_4RepPer
Note: When using letter or word template pieces, you must set up the letters
and/or words as assessments in the course on the Assessments tab. Make sure
to use the Checkmark for Report Cards mark type.
Marks template pieces display grades and/or marks for assessments by subject. The following
marks template pieces are available.
Marks (2 Columns)
Marks (3 Columns)
Marks (3 Columns, 1/2 Width)
Marks (4 Columns)
Marks (4 Columns, 1/2 Width)
Marks (5 Columns)
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
265
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Marks (5 Columns, 1/2 Width)
Marks (6 Columns)
Marks (7 Columns)
Messages template pieces display custom message text entered on the Messages tab. Message
X (1 through 12) options are available and all display the text entered in the Messages fields in
two size formats: half-page and full-page widths. Each option is available with and without
borders. Text entered in the Additional Mark Explanation Message field displays with the Index
template piece. Each message field allows up to 6,000 characters of text.
Message 1 (1/2 Width & Border)
Message 1 (Half Width)
Message 1 (Page Width & Border)
Message 1 (Page Width)
One Column Section template piece inserts a one-column section on a page that uses a
two-column format.
Page Break template piece inserts a page break between multiple pages of a report card
indicating the end of one student’s report card. This template piece MUST be the last sequence
number in the list of template pieces.
Parent Signature template pieces display the possible combination of the student’s name, a
blank line for the parent’s signature and the text “Conference Requested? Yes No.” The following
parent signature template pieces are available.
266
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Parent Signature Line
Parent Signature Section (Full Width)
Placement Status template pieces display promotion or placement to a succeeding grade or
retention in the current grade. The following placement status template pieces are available.
End of Year Placement
End of Year Placement (Full Width)
End of Year Placement (Promoted, Placed, Retained)
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
267
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
End of Yr Place (Pro, Pla, Ret, Exp) - 1/2 Width
Principal Signature template piece displays the principal’s name and a blank line for a signature.
Principal Signature Line
School Header template piece displays the school district name, the name of the school and
report card title on separate lines centered in the column or on the page. The school district name
that displays in this template piece was entered on the District Setup screen. The name of the
school was entered on the Schools Setup screen. The title was entered in the Report Card Title
field on the Messages tab. If you do not enter any text in the Report Card Title field on the
Messages tab, a title does not display when using the School Header template piece.
School Header (District, School &
Title)
Student Header template piece displays the combination of the student’s name, grade, teacher’s
name, school year, principal’s name and student’s identification number. The following student
header template pieces are available.
Student Header with Principal
Student Header (Teacher, Principal, ID)
268
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Teacher & Principal Signatures template piece displays the teacher, date and principal.
Teacher & Principal Signatures
Teacher Comments template pieces display teacher’s comments. These comments are not
associated with individual subjects. The following teacher comments template pieces are
available.
Teacher Comments (1/2 Page)
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
269
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Teacher Comments (1/2 Page, Semester 1 & 2)
The size of this template piece expands based on the amount of text entered.
Teacher Comments (Curr Per, Full Width, No Border)
Teacher Comments (Curr Per, 1/2 Width)
270
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Teacher Comments (Full Page)
Teacher Comments (Full Width)
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
271
Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates
Teacher Comments (Trimester, Full Width)
Two Column Section template piece inserts a two-column section on a page that uses a
one-column format.
272
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Appendix B: Sample Traditional Report
Card
The purpose of this appendix is to provide detailed instructions for creating a sample traditional or
secondary report card that is representative of the type of report card you can create for your
school district. In this report card sample, the school district is integrated with a student
information system and is not printing this report card from ProgressBook GradeBook.
Although secondary report cards are printed from your student information system, it is still
necessary to set up the report card in ProgressBook GradeBook. Following this procedure creates
an entry screen that allow teachers to enter grades from their grade book and ensures that the
information transfers into the proper fields in the student information system.
Traditional Report Card Entry Screen Example
Create Report Cards – General Tab
1. On the Administrator Home Page, click the Report Card Builder link under Grading
Setup.
2. On the Report Cards screen click the Add a Report Card link near the bottom of the
screen.
The General link is highlighted in the Web site banner.
3. On the General tab, enter High School Report Card.
4. Select Report Card as the type of report.
5. Select the Secondary format.
Note: You do not need to select a template if you are not printing report cards
from ProgressBook GradeBook.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
273
Assign Grade Levels to Schools – Grade Levels Tab
6. Select Advanced Calculations in the Which Average Calculation Method would you like
to use? list.
7. Select 2 in the Select the rounding precision to use when averaging numeric grades list.
8. Select 2 in the Select the rounding precision to use when averaging from letter grades list.
9. Verify that Testing is selected as the report card mode. This is the default option.
10. Select Live in the data integration method list if your district is integrated with a student
information system.
11. Select the student information system your district is integrated with in the data
integration source list.
Secondary Option on the General Tab
12. Select No to prevent ProgressBook GradeBook users with school administrator access
from making changes to this report card. Yes is the default option and allows
ProgressBook GradeBook users with administrator access to edit the report card.
13. Select Yes to display the report card on the Parent Access Web Site. The default option
is No. Select No if your school district does not use the Parent Access Web Site or does
not want to display the report card on Parent Access.
14. Click Save.
The Grade Levels tab displays automatically.
Assign Grade Levels to Schools – Grade Levels Tab
1. On the Grade Levels tab, select the check boxes in the Grade Levels 09, 10, 11, 12
columns for the school that will use this report card.
2. Click Save.
274
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Assign Order to Reporting Periods – Periods Tab
Grade Levels Tab on the Report Card Screen
3. Click Periods in the Web site banner.
Assign Order to Reporting Periods – Periods Tab
1. On the Periods tab, enter 1 in the Seq# column for the 1st Quarter (Q1).
2. Enter 2 in the Seq# column for the 2nd Quarter (Q2).
3. Enter 3 in the Seq# column for the Exam Sem 1 (EX1).
4. Enter 4 in the Seq# column for the Sem 1 Avg (S1).
5. Enter 5 in the Seq# column for the Final 1st (FIN1).
6. Enter 6 in the Seq# column for the 3rd Quarter (Q3).
7. Enter 7 in the Seq# column for the 4th Quarter (Q4).
8. Enter 8 in the Seq# column for the Exam Sem 2 (EX2).
9. Enter 9 in the Seq# column for the Sem 2 Avg (S2).
10. Enter 10 in the Seq# column for the Year Final (YF).
11. Click Save.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
275
Add Assessments – Assessments Tab
Seq# Column on the Periods Tab
12. Click Assessments in the Web site banner.
Add Assessments – Assessments Tab
In this report card sample, since the school district is integrated with a student information system,
we must add the semester exams and semester averages as assessments so the marks are
transferred properly to the student information system.
1. Enter Grade in the first blank row in the Assessment column.
2. Enter 10 in the Seq# column. Use sequence numbers in increments of 10 so that you can
add assessments later if needed between existing sequence numbers.
3. Select Academic-HS in the Mark Type list.
Note: The Mark Type options vary depending on the student information system
with which your school district is integrated. Make sure to select the mark type
that is unique to the school building you are creating the report card for.
4. Select the District Default in the Default Grading Scale list.
5. Select Y in the Value Req? list to identify teachers who have not submitted grades for any
of their students for this particular assessment on the Report Card Verification Report.
6. Select Grading Period in the External Reference list.
Note: The External Reference options vary depending on the student information
system with which your school district is integrated.
7. Continue to enter the following assessments in the appropriate columns, respectively.
276
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Associate Assessments with Reporting Periods – Requirements Tab
Assessment
Seq#
Mark Type
Value
Req?
Default Grading Scale
External
Reference
Comment
20
Comment
N/A
N
Comment 1
Semester Exam
30
Academic-HS
N/A
N
Exam
Semester 1 Average
40
Academic-HS
District Default
Y
Average
Semester 1 Final
50
Academic-HS
District Default
N
Average
Semester 2 Average
60
Academic-HS
District Default
Y
Average
Year Final
70
Academic-HS
District Default
Y
Final
8. Click Save.
Assessments Tab on the Report Card Screen
9. Click Requirements in the Web site banner.
Associate Assessments with Reporting Periods –
Requirements Tab
You must designate the reporting periods in which each assessment will be used.
1. On the Requirements tab, select the Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 reporting periods for the Grade
assessment.
2. Continue to associate the following assessments with the appropriate reporting periods,
respectively.
Reporting
Period(s)
Assessment
Comment
Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4
Semester Exam
EX1, EX2
Semester 1 Average
S1
Semester 1 Final
FIN1
Semester 2 Average
S2
Year Final
YF
3. Click Save.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
277
Determine Protected Marks – Protected Marks Tab
A check box that is not selected denotes that an assessment is not required for the
reporting period and the assessment appears shaded on the Report Card Entry screen.
Requirements Tab on the Report Card Tab
4. Click Protected Marks in the Web site banner.
Determine Protected Marks – Protected Marks Tab
For this report card sample, we will designate the marks that will not be overridden when
ProgressBook GradeBook exports report card grades to the student information system.
1. On the Protected Marks tab, select Override All Marks Except for the Following.
2. Type W in the Mark column in the first blank row.
3. Type WD in the next blank row.
4. Click Save.
Protected Marks Tab on the Report Card Screen
Note: If your school district is not integrated with a student information system,
you must still select one of the three Protected Marks options or the report card
will not work.
5. Click Advanced Calc in the Web site banner.
278
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Assign Grade Entry Methods to Assessments and Reporting Periods – Advanced Calcs Tab
Assign Grade Entry Methods to Assessments and Reporting
Periods – Advanced Calcs Tab
Since we selected Use Advanced Calculations as the Average Calculation Method on the General
tab, we must now assign report card grade entry methods to all the assessments in all the
reporting periods used on the report card.
1. On the Advanced Calc tab, select Pull from Gradebook in the Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 reporting
periods lists for the Grade assessment.
2. Continue to assign the following grade entry methods to the following assessments in the
appropriate reporting periods, respectively.
Grade Entry
Method
Assessment
Reporting Period
Manual Entry
Comment
Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4
Manual Entry
Semester Exam
EX1, EX2
System Calculation Semester 1 Average
S1
System Calculation Semester 1 Final
FIN1
System Calculation Semester 2 Average
S2
System Calculation Year Final
YF
3. Click Save.
4. Click System Calcs in the Web site banner.
Set Up Average Calculation Methods for System
Calculations – System Calcs Tab
Since we have assigned report card grade entry methods to all assessments in the reporting
periods used on the report card, we must now set up how grades will be calculated for the
Semester Averages, Semester Final and Year Final assessments that were designated as
System Calculations.
1. On the System Calcs tab, select Semester 1 Average in the Calculation list.
Note: The options that display in this list were assigned as System Calculation on
the Advanced Calc screen.
2. Select Q1 Grade in the Period & Assessment column.
3. Type 2 in the Weight column. This number represents the significance of the Q1 grade in
relationship to the whole average.
Note: Weights for exams and finals are usually predetermined by your school
district.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
279
Set Up Average Calculation Methods for System Calculations – System Calcs Tab
System Calcs Tab on the Report Card Screen
4. Continue to associate average calculation methods with weights in the following columns,
respectively, for the Semester 1 Average calculation.
Period & Assessment
Weight
Q2 Grade
2
EX1 Semester Exam
1
5. Select Use Averages (from Gradebook) in the Select the Calculation Method list. This
means that the quarterly percentages from the grade book are used when calculating
semester finals and year-end final averages.
Note: You can select different calculation methods for each system calculation
being defined.
6. Select Use the Grade Book Grading Scale in the Select the Grading Scale list. This
means that the grading scale selected by the teacher on the Grading Scale Setup screen
will be used when calculating semester finals and year-end final averages.
7. Click Save.
Note: These system calculations will be available when setting up the Year to
Date calculation method.
8. Select Semester 2 Average in the Calculation list.
9. Continue to associate average calculation methods with weights in the following columns,
respectively, for the Semester 2 Average calculation.
280
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Set Up Average Calculation Methods for System Calculations – System Calcs Tab
Period & Assessment
Weight
Q3 Grade
2
Q4 Grade
2
EX2 Semester Exam
1
10. Select Use Averages (from Gradebook) in the Select the Calculation Method list.
11. Select Use the Grade Book Grading Scale in the Select the Grading Scale list.
12. Click Save.
13. Select Semester 1 Final in the Calculation list.
14. Continue to associate average calculation methods with weights in the following columns,
respectively, for the Semester 1 Final calculation.
Period & Assessment
Weight
Q1 Grade
2
Q2 Grade
2
EX1 Semester Exam
1
15. Select Use Averages (from Gradebook) in the Select the Calculation Method list.
16. Select Use the Grade Book Grading Scale in the Select the Grading Scale list.
17. Click Save.
Period & Assessment and Weight Columns on the System
Calcs Tab
18. Select Year Final in the Calculation list.
19. Continue to associate average calculation methods with weights in the following columns,
respectively, for the Year Final calculation.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
281
Set Up Year to Date Calculation Method
Period & Assessment
Weight
Q1 Grade
2
Q2 Grade
2
EX1 Semester Exam
1
Q3 Grade
2
Q4 Grade
2
EX2 Semester Exam
1
20. Select Use Averages (from Gradebook) in the Select the Calculation Method list.
21. Select Use the Grade Book Grading Scale in the Select the Grading Scale list.
22. Click Save.
Calculation List on the System Calcs Tab
Set Up Year to Date Calculation Method
We want to assign a calculation for which we want a cumulative year-to-date grade to display in
teachers' grade books.
1. On the Year To Date Calc tab, select YF Year Final in the Calculation list.
Note: You can only select one calculation at a time to be used in the Year to Date
calculation method.
2. Select the check box next to the Enable Year to Date calculation on teacher gradebooks
option.
3. Click Save.
282
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Compile Report Card
The following message displays, “It is recommended that gradebooks that use this report
card be recalculated by clicking here.
”
Clicking here Ling on the Year To Date Calc
Compile Report Card
The report card or interim must be compiled successfully before teachers can use it to enter
grades on the Report Card Entry screen. ProgressBook GradeBook runs numerous verifications
to make sure the report card is set up properly. Once the report card has been compiled, each
time it is changed, it must be recompiled. The status displays in the Compile Results column on
the Report Cards screen where you can easily see if the report card contains warnings or errors.
1. On the Web site banner, click the Compile link.
The compiled report card or interim displays in a separate browser window listing any
warnings or errors that were detected during compilation. A reference number displays
next to the description of each warning or error. This reference number is used for
troubleshooting purposes by ProgressBook GradeBook Support personnel.
Error and Warning Messages from the Compile Tab
The following warnings and/or errors may occur:
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
283
Compile Report Card
•
Warning – Potential errors were found during compilation, but teachers can use the
report card to enter grades on the Report Card Entry screen. It is recommended to
investigate the warnings and try to correct any issues.
•
Critical error – Errors were found during compilation that prevent the report card
from displaying and teachers from entering grades on the Report Card Entry screen
until they are corrected.
•
Severe error – Errors were found during compilation that prevent teachers from
entering grades on the Report Card Entry screen until they are corrected.
If there are no warnings or errors, the following message displays. “Congratulations, no
errors were found! The report card compiled successfully.” Proceed with step 7.
2. If there are any warnings or errors, review the description, and then click the Go link.
The screen where the issue occurred that caused the warning or error displays behind the
Compiled Report Card/Interim screen.
3. Troubleshoot the issue(s) as needed.
4. Return to the Compiled Report Card/Interim screen, and then click Refresh.
If the warning or error was corrected, it does not display in the list. Proceed with step 5. If
the warning or error was not corrected, repeat step 2 through step 4 until the issue is
corrected. If you cannot correct the issue, follow your appropriate ProgressBook
GradeBook support channel.
5. On the Web site banner, click the Compile link again.
6. If the report card compiled without critical or severe errors, close the Compile Report
Card/Interim screen.
7. On the Web site banner, click the General tab.
8. Select the Active report card mode to make the report card available to teachers to enter
grades.
9. Click Save.
10. On the Web site banner, click the Compile link for the final time.
11. Close the Compile Report Card/Interim screen.
Note: If you have to make changes to a report card in Active mode, you must first
change the report card mode to Testing.
Note: You can compile a report card without opening it on the Report Cards
screen by clicking the Compile All Active Changed Report Cards link or by clicking
in the Actions column.
284
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Appendix B: Sample Traditional Report Card
Report Card Entry Screen
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
285
Appendix B: Sample Traditional Report Card
This page intentionally left blank.
286
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Appendix C: Sample Standards-Based
Report Card
The purpose of this appendix is to provide detailed instructions for creating a sample
standards-based report card that is representative of the type of report card you can create for
your school district. ProgressBook GradeBook provides numerous, custom-designed options for
printing report cards, a few of which are discussed in a later section. This sample details a few of
the more complex template options including letter boxes, using RTF code to enhance the display
of your report card and inserting subject continued subheadings when needed.
You are not limited to the options used in this example when building report cards in ProgressBook
GradeBook. Typically, a district designs the report card and standards assessment language for
each subject in advance. This design phase may include consideration of the template options
that ProgressBook GradeBook offers. See “Appendix A: Report Card/Interim Templates” . Once
the design has been agreed upon, the ProgressBook GradeBook system manager creates the
report card in ProgressBook GradeBook following a similar procedure as the one included in this
chapter.
Upon completion of this chapter, you will have created a report card similar to “Standards-Based
Report Card Example – Page 1” .
Standards-Based Report Card Example – Page 1
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
287
Create Report Cards – General Tab
Standards-Based Report Card Example – Page 2
Create Report Cards – General Tab
1. On the Administrator Home Page, click the Report Card Builder link under Grading
Setup.
2. On the Report Cards screen click the Add a Report Card link near the bottom of the
screen.
The General link is highlighted in the Web site banner.
3. On the General tab, enter 1st Grade Report Card.
4. Select Report Card as the type of report.
5. Select the Elementary format.
6. Select Standard Elementary Report Card (Legal tri-fold) in the template list.
7. Verify that Use Basic Calculations is selected in the Which Average Calculation Method
would you like to use? list. This is the default option.
8. Select 2 in the Select the rounding precision to use when averaging numeric grades list.
9. Select 2 in the Select the rounding precision to use when averaging from letter grades list.
10. Verify that Testing is selected as the report card mode. This is the default option.
11. Select None in the data integration method list if your district is not integrated with a
student information system or if your district is integrated with a student information
system, but you do not export marks to the system.
288
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Assign Grade Levels to Schools – Grade Levels Tab
Elementary Option on the General Tab
12. Select None in the data integration source list if you selected None in step 11.
13. Select No to prevent ProgressBook GradeBook users with school administrator access
from making changes to this report card. Yes is the default option and allows
ProgressBook GradeBook users with administrator access to edit the report card.
14. Select Yes to display the report card on the Parent Access Web Site. The default option
is No. Select No if your school district does not use the Parent Access Web Site or does
not want to display the report card on Parent Access.
15. Click Save.
The Grade Levels screen automatically displays.
Assign Grade Levels to Schools – Grade Levels Tab
1. On the Grade Levels tab, select the check boxes in the grade level columns for each
school that will use this report card.
2. Click Save.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
289
Assign Order to Reporting Periods – Periods Tab
Grade Levels Tab on the Report Card Screen
3. Click Periods in the Web site banner.
Assign Order to Reporting Periods – Periods Tab
1. On the Periods tab, enter 1 in the Seq# column for the row that represents the first
reporting period.
2. Enter 2 in the Seq# column for the row that represents the second reporting period.
3. Enter 3 in the Seq# column for the row that represents the third reporting period.
4. Enter 4 in the Seq# column for the row that represents the fourth reporting period.
5. Enter 5 in the Seq# column for the row that represents the final reporting period.
6. Enter 6 in the Seq# column for the row that represents the all-year reporting period.
Note: This step is necessary only if a Kindergarten Letter template piece is used
on the report card.
7. Click Save.
290
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Add Courses – Courses Tab
Seq# Column on the Periods Tab
8. Click Courses in the Web site banner.
Add Courses – Courses Tab
1. On the Courses tab, enter 10 in the first blank row in the Seq# column.
2. Enter Reading in the first blank row in the Course Name (for Rpt Card) column next to
Seq#10.
3. Continue to enter the following numbers in the Seq# column and subject names in the
Course Name (for Rpt Card) column, respectively.
Seq#
Course
20
Writing
30
Mathematics
40
Science
50
Social Studies
60
Art
70
Music
80
Physical Education
90
Work Habits & Skills
100
Attendance
Note: Use sequence numbers in increments of 10 so that you can add subjects
later between existing subjects if needed.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
291
Add Courses – Courses Tab
4. Click Save.
Notice the Add Courses link displays in the Action column next to each subject entered.
Add Courses Link in the Action Column on the Courses Tab
5. Click the Add Courses link in the Action column for the Reading subject.
The Course Search window displays.
Search for Courses
On the Course Search window, Reading displays in the Course Name field because
ProgressBook GradeBook searches for courses that matches the same name that was entered
in the Course Name (for Rpt Card) column on the Courses tab. All courses called Reading or
course names that start with the word Reading display.
1. Click the check box in the Select column for Reading – Gr 01.
292
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Add Courses – Courses Tab
Course Search Window
2. Click Add the selected courses.
3. Close the Course Search window.
Reading – Gr 01 displays in the Included Courses column next to the Reading subject on
the Courses tab. All class sections derived from the Reading – Gr 01 course will be
associated with the Reading subject on this report card.
Included Courses Column on the Courses Tab
It may happen that you are searching for courses that are named differently than the course name
you are using on the report card.
1. On the Courses tab, click the Add Courses link in the Action column for the Physical
Education subject.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
293
Add Courses – Courses Tab
Specific Course Searched on the Course Search Window
2.
Delete Physical Education from the Course Name field, and then click Go.
Note: To narrow the search for only first grade Physical Education courses, you
could select 01 in the Grade list.
3. Select Fitness – Gr 01.
4. Click Add the selected course.
5. Close the Course Search window.
Continue to Add Courses
1. On the Courses tab, continue to add courses to subjects until you have added all of the
necessary courses to all the subject names on the report card.
Course Name (for Rpt Card) and Included Courses Columns on the Courses
Tab
Note: In some instances it may be necessary to add more than one course to a
particular subject. For example, if the special education math teacher is
responsible for entering report card grades, associate the special education math
course as well as the regular education math course with the Mathematics course
name on the report card.
Note: If you have associated a course with a course name and it does not
immediately display in the Included Courses column, click Save to refresh the
screen.
294
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Add Assessments – Assessments Tab
2. Enter 15 in the first available blank row in the Seq# column to add another course that was
forgotten.
Note: Using sequence numbers in increments of five allows newly added courses
to be inserted between courses that have already been added. The sequence
numbers control the order in which the courses appear on the Report Card Entry
screen for teachers, but not the printed report card.
3. Enter Letter & Sound Recognition in the first available blank row in the Course Name
(for Rpt Card) column.
4. Click Save.
Letter & Sound Recognition displays between Reading and Writing in the appropriate
order in the list of courses.
5. Click the Add Courses link in the Action column next to the Letter & Sound Recognition
subject to search for the appropriate courses to add on the Course Search window. See
“Search for Courses” .
The Course Search window displays.
Letter Courses Searched on the Course Search Window
6. Select Letter R – Gr 01 in the list of search results, and then click Add the selected
courses.
On the Courses tab Letter R – Gr 01 displays in the Included Courses column next to the
Letter & Sound Recognition subject.
7. Click Save.
8. Click Assessments in the Web site banner.
Add Assessments – Assessments Tab
The course names entered on the Courses tab display alphabetically in the Course list on the
Assessments tab.
1. On the Assessments tab, select Mathematics in the Course list.
2. Enter Grade in the first blank row in the Assessment column.
3. Enter 10 in the Seq# column. Use sequence numbers in increments of 10 so that you can
add assessments later if needed between existing sequence numbers.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
295
Add Assessments – Assessments Tab
4. Select A-F in the Mark Type list.
5. Select Lake View Primary School Default in the Default Grading Scale list.
6. Select Highest Achieved in the Default Calculation list to instruct ProgressBook
GradeBook which calculation method to use in calculating students’ marks.
7. Select Y in the Pull Mark? list to instruct ProgressBook GradeBook to automatically
populate the assessment mark when the grade is automatically calculated.
8. Select Y in the Print Mark? list to instruct ProgressBook GradeBook to automatically print
the assessment mark on the report card.
9. Select Y in the Value Req? list to identify teachers who have not submitted grades for any
of their students for this particular assessment on the Report Card Verification Report.
10. Continue to enter the following assessments, sequence numbers, mark types, default
grading scales, default calculations, pull mark, print mark and required value options for
the Mathematics course.
Assessment
296
Seq#
Mark
Type
Default
Grading Scale
Default
Calculation
Pull
Mark
Print
Mark
Value
Req
Y
Standardized Test Score
12
Points
N/A
None
Y
N
Effort
20
1-4
Rubric Scale
(1-4)
None
N
Y
Numeration
30
Applies place value concept
40
1-4
Rubric Scale
(1-4)
Highest
Achieved
Classifies, compares and orders
numbers
50
1-4
Rubric Scale
(1-4)
Highest
Achieved
Represents fractions
60
1-4
Rubric Scale
(1-4)
Highest
Achieved
Identifies and counts money
70
1-4
Rubric Scale
(1-4)
Highest
Achieved
Understands addition and
subtraction
80
1-4
Rubric Scale
(1-4)
Highest
Achieved
Measurement
90
Measures accurately
100
1-4
Rubric Scale
(1-4)
Highest
Achieved
Applies concepts of time
110
1-4
Rubric Scale
(1-4)
Highest
Achieved
Geometry
120
Identifies and compares
geometric shapes
130
1-4
Rubric Scale
(1-4)
Highest
Achieved
Recognizes symmetry
140
1-4
Rubric Scale
(1-4)
Highest
Achieved
Patterns, Functions and Algebra
150
Recognizes, creates and extends
patterns
160
1-4
Rubric Scale
(1-4)
Highest
Achieved
Represents story problems
170
1-4
Rubric Scale
(1-4)
Highest
Achieved
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Add Assessments – Assessments Tab
Assessment
Seq#
Mark
Type
Default
Grading Scale
Default
Calculation
Data Analysis and Probability
180
Classifies and sorts objects
190
1-4
Rubric Scale
(1-4)
Highest
Achieved
Evaluates graphs, tables and
charts
200
1-4
Rubric Scale
(1-4)
Highest
Achieved
Creates graphs, tables and
charts
210
1-4
Rubric Scale
(1-4)
Highest
Achieved
Problem Solving and
Mathematical Processes
220
Applies strategies to solve
problems
230
1-4
Rubric Scale
(1-4)
Highest
Achieved
Pull
Mark
Print
Mark
Value
Req
Note: For the standards headings: Numeration, Measurement, Geometry,
Patterns, Functions and Algebra, Data Analysis and Probability and Problem
Solving and Mathematical Processes, you can leave the Mark Type option blank
because they do not receive a mark.
Note: If you do not select an option in the Mark Type list, the default option,
Period Attendance, displays after you save. The default options: N/A, None, Y, Y
and N, respectively, display in the Default Grading Scale, Default Calculation, Pull
Mark?, Print Mark? and Value Req? lists after you save, if you do not select any
options.
11. Click Save.
Course List on the Assessments Tab
12. Continue to enter the following assessments, sequence numbers, mark types, default
grading scales, default calculations, pull mark, print mark and required value options for
the Reading course.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
297
Add Assessments – Assessments Tab
Seq#
Mark
Type
Default
Pull
Calculation Mark
Print
Mark
Value
Req
Grade
10
A-F
Lake View Primary
School Default
Last
Achieved
Y
Y
Y
Effort
20
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
None
N
Basic Reading Skills
30
Recognizes connection between
letters and
40
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Last
Achieved
Recognizes sight words
50
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Last
Achieved
Reads fluently
60
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Last
Achieved
Comprehension Skills
70
Predicts & supports from text
80
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Last
Achieved
Draws conclusions
90
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Last
Achieved
Summarizes
100
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Last
Achieved
Compares & contrasts
110
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Last
Achieved
Self-monitors reading
120
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Last
Achieved
Respond to multi-level questions
130
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Last
Achieved
Acquires Vocabulary
140
Uses context clues
150
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Last
Achieved
Identifies word parts & meanings
160
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Last
Achieved
Classifies words into categories
170
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Last
Achieved
Comprehends Informational Text
180
Applies above skills to non-fiction
190
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Last
Achieved
Identifies main ideas & details
200
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Last
Achieved
Comprehends Literary Text
210
Applies above skills to fiction
220
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Last
Achieved
Identifies setting, characters &
events
230
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Last
Achieved
Assessment
Default Grading
Scale
13. Continue to enter the following assessments, sequence numbers, mark types, default
grading scales, default calculations, pull mark, print mark and required value options for
the Writing course.
298
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Add Assessments – Assessments Tab
Seq#
Mark
Type
Default
Calculation
Pull
Mark
Print
Mark
Value
Req
Mark
10
A-F
Lake View Primary
School Default
Last
Achieved
Y
Y
Y
Effort
20
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
None
N
Writing Processes
30
Uses writing process (drafts,
revises, edits)
40
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Last
Achieved
Writing Applications
50
Responds to literature
60
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Last
Achieved
Writes beginning, middle and end
70
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Last
Achieved
Writes using main idea and
supporting details
80
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Last
Achieved
Writes friendly letters and
invitations
90
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Last
Achieved
Applies Writing Conventions
100
Prints legibly
110
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Last
Achieved
Spells grade appropriate words
120
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Last
Achieved
Uses correct punctuation and
capitalization
130
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Last
Achieved
Writes with correct grammar
140
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Last
Achieved
Oral communications
150
Speaks with correct grammar
160
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Last
Achieved
Stays on topic
170
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Last
Achieved
Assessment
Default Grading
Scale
14. Continue to enter the following assessments, sequence numbers, mark types, default
grading scales, default calculations, pull mark, print mark and required value options for
the Science course.
Seq#
Mark
Type
Grade
10
Effort
20
Earth and Space Science
30
Identifies relationships of Earth's
systems
Analyzes weather
Assessment
Default Grading
Scale
Default
Calculation
Pull
Mark
Print
Mark
Value
Req
A-F
Lake View Primary
School Default
Power Law
Y
Y
Y
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
None
N
40
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Power Law
50
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Power Law
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
299
Add Assessments – Assessments Tab
Assessment
Seq#
Life Science
60
Recognizes concepts of living
things
70
Physical Science
80
Compares physical characteristics
and changes
90
Scientific Ways of Knowing
100
Questions and observes for
scientific investigation
110
Health
120
Understands relationship between
personal behavior and wellness
130
Mark
Type
Default Grading
Scale
Default
Calculation
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Power Law
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Power Law
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Power Law
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Power Law
Pull
Mark
Print
Mark
Value
Req
15. Continue to enter the following assessments, sequence numbers, mark types, default
grading scales, default calculations, pull mark, print mark and required value options for
the Social Studies course.
Seq#
Mark
Type
Default
Calculation
Pull
Mark
Print
Mark
Value
Req
Grade
10
A-F
Lake View Primary
School Default
Power Law
Y
Y
Y
Effort
20
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
None
N
History
30
Recognizes chronological order
40
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Power Law
Compares past and present day
societies
50
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Power Law
Recognizes contributions of
historical figures
60
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Power Law
People and Societies
70
Identifies and compares cultural
groups
80
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Power Law
Geography
90
Identifies and uses map skills
100
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Power Law
Economics
110
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Power Law
Identifies wants and needs
120
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Power Law
Identifies goods and services
130
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Power Law
Government
140
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Power Law
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Power Law
Assessment
Identifies organization and purpose 150
Citizenship RIghts and
Responsibilities
160
Describes citizenship
responsibilities
170
300
Default Grading
Scale
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Add Assessments – Assessments Tab
Assessment
Seq#
Social Studies Skills and Methods
180
Uses variety of sources to obtain
information and make decisions
190
Mark
Type
Default Grading
Scale
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Default
Calculation
Pull
Mark
Print
Mark
Value
Req
Power Law
16. Continue to enter the following assessments, sequence numbers, mark types, default
grading scales, default calculations, pull mark, print mark and required value options for
the Art course.
Seq#
Mark
Type
Default
Calculation
Pull
Mark
Print
Mark
Value
Req
Grade
10
A-F
Lake View Primary
School Default
Highest
Achieved
Y
Y
Y
Effort
20
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
None
N
Uses original ideas
30
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Highest
Achieved
Applies skills
40
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Highest
Achieved
Demonstrates craftsmanship
50
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Highest
Achieved
Assessment
Default Grading
Scale
17. Continue to enter the following assessments, sequence numbers, mark types, default
grading scales, default calculations, pull mark, print mark and required value options for
the Music course.
Seq#
Mark
Type
Default
Calculation
Pull
Mark
Print
Mark
Value
Req
Grade
10
A-F
Lake View
Primary School
Default
Highest
Achieved
Y
Y
Y
Effort
20
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
None
N
Demonstrates rhythmic
understanding
30
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Highest
Achieved
Demonstrates melodic recognition
40
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Highest
Achieved
Actively participates in creating &
performing
50
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Highest
Achieved
Demonstrates self-control
60
1-4
Rubric Scale (1-4)
Highest
Achieved
Assessment
Default Grading
Scale
Y
18. Continue to enter the following assessments, sequence numbers and mark types for the
Work Habits course.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
301
Add Assessments – Assessments Tab
Assessment
Seq#
Mark Type
Uses time wisely
10
Check+, Check, Check-
Works independently
20
Check+, Check, Check-
Stays on task
30
Check+, Check, Check-
Seeks help as appropriate
40
Check+, Check, Check-
Follows written directions
50
Check+, Check, Check-
Follows oral directions
60
Check+, Check, Check-
Listens attentively
70
Check+, Check, Check-
Completes work carefully
and neatly
80
Check+, Check, Check-
Organizes work area and
materials
90
Check+, Check, Check-
Returns homework
100
Check+, Check, Check-
Attitude and Citizenship
110
Follows rules
120
Check+, Check, Check-
Respects authority
130
Check+, Check, Check-
Interacts appropriately with
peers
140
Check+, Check, Check-
Accepts responsibility
150
Check+, Check, Check-
Demonstrates self-control
160
Check+, Check, Check-
Default
Grading
Scale
Default
Calculation
Pull
Mark
Print
Mark
Value
Req
Copy Assessments
You can save time by copying assessments from one subject to another.
1. Select a course in the Course list as the course to which you want to copy assessments.
2. Select a report card in the Copy the requirements from list.
3. Select a course in the next list as the course from which you want to copy assessments.
302
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Add Assessments – Assessments Tab
Copy the requirements from List on the Assessments Tab
4. Click Copy.
The copied assessments display.
5. Adjust the wording of assessments, if necessary.
6. Select Highest Achieved for each assessment in the Default Calculation list.
7. Click Save to save the copied assessments.
Continue to Add Assessments
The Letter & Sound Recognition subject is different than the other subjects to which we have
added assessments. You need to create an individual assessment for each uppercase letter,
lowercase letter, and letter sound for a total of 78 total assessments.
1. On the Assessments tab, select Letter & Sound Recognition in the Course list.
2. You can enter sequence numbers 1 through 78. You do not have to use sequence
numbers in increments of 10 for this subject since there is no possibility of having to insert
additional assessments.
3. For sequence numbers 1 through 78, enter a corresponding assessment that is an
uppercase letter, lowercase letter and letter sound for each letter of the alphabet. For
example, A, a, A sound each as individual assessments.
4. Select Checkmark for Report Cards as the Mark Type unless you want the teachers to
have the ability to create assignments for each of these 78 assessments.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
303
Add Assessments – Assessments Tab
5. You do not have to select any options in the Default Grading Scale, Default Calculation,
Pull Mark, Print Mark and Value Req lists. The default options in each column will display
after you save.
6. Click Save.
Note: If you run out of new rows as you are adding assessments, click Save
occasionally to display new rows.
7. Select Attendance in the Course list.
8. Enter the following assessments, sequence numbers, mark types, default calculations,
pull mark, print mark and required value options for the Attendance course.
Assessment
Seq#
Mark Type
Default
Grading Scale
Default
Calculation
Pull
Mark
Print
Mark
Value
Req
Y
Y
Days Present
10
Points
Average
Y
Days Absent
20
Points
Average
Y
Y
Times Tardy
30
Points
Average
Y
Y
Comments (do not
exceed 495 characters)
40
Comment
Y
Y
Promoted to grade
50
End-of-Year
Placement
Y
Placed in grade
60
End-of-Year
Placement
Y
Retained in grade
70
End-of-Year
Placement
Y
Note: The default option, N/A, displays in the Default Grading Scale list after you
save if you do not choose an option.
9. Click Save.
Note: The Attendance subject is a logical place for the homeroom teacher to add
quarterly comments to the report card. The character count varies depending on
the type/size of the Comments template piece selected on the Template tab.
Attendance Assessments on the Assessments Tab
304
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Associate Assessments with Reporting Periods – Requirements Tab
10. Click Requirements in the Web site banner.
Associate Assessments with Reporting Periods –
Requirements Tab
1. On the Requirements tab, select the reporting period in which each assessment is
evaluated.
Note: When there are numerous assessments, it may be more efficient to click
Select All to select all the assessments in all the reporting periods, and then
deselect the specific assessments in the reporting periods that are not required.
Requirements Tab on the Report Card Screen
2. Click Save.
3. Deselect all of the check marks for the assessments in the AY (All Year) reporting period
except for the assessments in the Letter & Sound Recognition course.
4. Deselect the check marks for any assessments that are standards headings such as Basic
Reading Skills and Comprehension Skills because they don’t receive marks.
5. Deselect the check marks for YEF for all of the Letter & Sound Recognition assessments
and the Comments assessment for the Attendance course.
6. Deselect Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4 for the Promoted, Placed and Retained assessments.
7. Click Save.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
305
Determine Protected Marks – Protected Marks Tab
Reporting Period Columns on the Requirements Tab
8. Click Protected Marks in the Web site banner.
Determine Protected Marks – Protected Marks Tab
1. On the Protected Marks tab, select Override All Marks.
Note: Even though the school district’s report card is not integrated with a student
information system, you must select one of the three Protected Marks options or
the report card will not work.
Override All Marks on the Protected Marks Screen
2. Click Save.
3. Click Average Calcs in the Web site banner.
306
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Set Up Average Calculation Method – Average Calcs Tab
Set Up Average Calculation Method – Average Calcs Tab
Since we selected Use Basic Calculations as the Average Calculation Method on the General tab,
and set up four reporting periods and a year-end final average on the Periods tab, we must now
configure the formula for the year-end final average.
1. On the Average Calcs tab, select Year-End Final in the Reporting Period list.
2. Select 1st QUARTER in the list in the first row of the Period column.
3. Select 2nd QUARTER in the list in the second row of the Period column.
4. Select 3rd QUARTER in the list in the third row of the Period column.
5. Select 4th QUARTER in the list in the fourth row of the Period column.
6. Enter 1 in the Weight column in for each of the four quarters.
Note: The number in the Weight column means that each of the four quarters
represents 1/4 or 25% of the final average.
7. Select Use Averages in the Select the Calculation Method list.
The Use Averages calculation method means that regardless of the letter grade that is
issued for each of the four grading periods, ProgressBook GradeBook uses the averages
in the teacher’s grade book for each of the four quarters to derive the year-end average.
If your school uses letter grade values to determine the year-end average, then select the
Use Grades calculation method. In that case an A has a value of 4, B = 3, C = 2, D = 1 and
F = 0. ProgressBook GradeBook adds each of the four values and divides the total by four.
The result maps to the Point Range of the appropriate grading scale to determine a letter
for the year-end average.
8. Select Use the Grade Book Grading Scale in the Select the Grading Scale list.
9. Click Save.
Average Calcs Tab
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
307
Add Messages – Messages Tab
10. Click Messages in the Web site banner.
Add Messages – Messages Tab
1. On the Messages tab, enter First Grade Progress Report in the Report Card Title field.
Note: You can click Save at any time while entering text in the Message fields.
Whether or not you click Save after entering each message, be sure to click Save
after entering the last message before you leave the screen.
2. To create a message to parents, type Dear Parent/Guardian:{\par} in the Message 1
field. The {\par} is RTF code that generates a line break.
Messages Tab on the Report Card Screen
3. Type the remaining text in the Message 1 field:
Successful academic achievement requires the cooperative effort of the student, the
parent/guardian, and the school. Together, we can work to provide a quality educational
program.{\par}
This progress report is a record of your child’s overall achievement in school. Should
you desire additional information about your child’s progress, you are encouraged to
contact school personnel to arrange a conference.{\par}
Your assistance in helping your child be successful in school is truly appreciated.{\par}
Keith E. Richards{\par}
Superintendent of Schools.
4. Place your cursor in front of the superintendent’s name and press the Spacebar 35 times
to indent the name.
5. Repeat step 4 to indent the Superintendent of Schools title.
308
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Format Templates – Templates Tab
Message 1 Field on the Messages Tab
6. Type Explanation of Marks in the Message 2 field.
7. Type b = Beginning{\par} d = Developing{\par} s = Secure in the Message 3 field.
8. Type 4 = Excellent{\par} 3 = Good{\par} 2 = Needs Improvement{\par} 1 =
Unsatisfactory in the Message 4 field.
9. Click Save.
Necessary {\par} RTF Code for Line Breaks on the Messages Tab
10. Click Template in the Web site banner.
Format Templates – Templates Tab
The Legal tri-fold template is set up to display three columns on the front side of a legal-size piece
of paper and three columns on the back side. We will format the printed report card by adding
numerous template pieces to the template. Do not be overly concerned about making every item
perfect from the beginning of the formatting process. It may be easier to enter all of the template
pieces first and then correct column placement and spacing issues later.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
309
Format Templates – Templates Tab
The template pieces with corresponding sequence numbers 10 through 50 display in only one of
the six columns the report card.
1. On the Template tab, select File Header template piece in the Option column.
Note: The File Header must be the first template piece in a standards-based
report card.
2. Enter 10 in the Seq# column next to File Header.
3. Select Marks (5 column, 1/3 width) in the next three blank rows in the Option column.
4. Select Marks (4 column, 1/3 width) in the fourth blank row in the Option column.
5. Enter 20, 30, 40 and 50, respectively, in the Seq# column next to each Marks template
piece. Use sequence numbers in multiples of 10 to make it easier to insert additional
template pieces later or move existing template pieces to a new location in the list.
6. Select Art, Music, Physical Education and Work Habits and Skills, respectively, in the
Course list next to each Marks template piece.
7. Select Column Break in the next blank row in the Option column to designate the end of
the first column.
8. Enter 100 in the Seq# column next to the column break template piece. You may find it
helpful to use sequence numbers in multiples of 100 for each Column Break template
piece to allow for other template pieces to be inserted between them.
Seq# Column on the Template Tab
9. You do not have to select any options in the Font, Size and Rows After columns. The
default values in each column will display after you save.
10. Click Save.
11. Select the following template pieces in the Option column and enter numbers in the Seq#
column, respectively.
310
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Format Templates – Templates Tab
Seq#
Option
110
Teacher Comments (full page length)
200
Column Break
210
School Header (Title, District & School)
220
Student Header with Principal
230
Message 1 (with a border)
240
Message 2 (with a border)
250
Message 3 (with a border)
260
Message 4 (with a border)
270
Attendance (5 column with Days Present)
300
Column Break
310
Marks (5 column, 1/3 width)
320
Custom K Letter Box (Upper, Lower, Sound)
400
Column Break
410
Marks (5 column, 1/3 width)
420
Marks (5 column, 1/3 width)
500
Column Break
510
Marks (5 column, 1/3 width)
520
Marks (5 column, 1/3 width)
12. Click Save.
Note: Whenever you run out of blank rows, click Save. New additional empty
rows display at the bottom of the screen after you save.
13. Select the following courses in the Course list for the following template pieces in the
Option column.
Option
Course
Teacher Comments (full page length)
Attendance
Attendance (5 column with Days Present)
Attendance
Marks (5 column, 1/3 width)
Reading
Custom K Letter Box (Upper, Lower, Sound)
Letter & Sound
Marks (5 column, 1/3 width)
Writing
Marks (5 column, 1/3 width)
Science
Marks (5 column, 1/3 width)
Social Studies
Marks (5 column, 1/3 width)
Mathematics
14. You do not have to select any options in the Font, Size and Rows After columns. The
default values in each column will display after you save.
15. Change the 1 to 0 in the Rows After column for the Marks (5 column, 1/3 width) template
pieces associated with the Art and Music courses.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
311
Preview Report Card
16. Select Page Break in the Option column in the next blank row.
17. Enter 1000 in the Seq# column next to the Page Break template piece.
Page Break Entry on the Template Tab
18. Click Save.
Preview Report Card
1. Click the Preview link to view the printed report card layout.
2. On the File Download window, click Open to view the report card in RTF file format in
Microsoft Word.
3. In the RTF report card file, scroll to the far right of the screen to see the full width of the
outside portion and scroll down to bottom of the screen to see the inside portion.
The report card, as it is currently formatted, is three pages long, but needs to fit on two
pages. Notice that the Art, Music and Physical Education courses display with no spacing
between the courses. That is because on the Template tab, we changed the 1 in the Rows
After column to 0 for the Art and Music courses to eliminate the space.
312
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Preview Report Card
Standards-Based Report Card in RTF Format – Page 1
Also notice that the Mathematics course has continued from the bottom of the second
page to the top of the third page.
Standards-Based Report Card in RTF Format – Page 2
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
313
Preview Report Card
Standards-Based Report Card in RTF Format – Page 3
4. Close the RTF report card file.
Adjust Template to Eliminate Third Page
We will make some adjustments to the template such as reducing the point size of the template
pieces and removing specific column breaks to eliminate the third page.
1. On the Template tab, change the point size in the Size column from 10 to 9 for the template
pieces with sequence numbers 310 through 520.
Note: The default point size is 10; however, point sizes range from 2 to 20 points.
2. Click Save.
3. Click the check box in the Delete column for Seq# 400 Column Break and Seq# 500
Column Break.
Deleted Entries on the Template Tab
4. Click Save.
314
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Preview Report Card
Preview Adjusted Columns
1. Click Preview.
In the RTF report card file, notice that the third page has been eliminated. The Writing
course starts at the bottom of the first column and continues to the top of the second
column. The Social Studies course starts at the bottom of the second column and
continues to the top of the third column.
Two Page Report Card
2. Close the RTF report card file.
Add Subject Continued Assessments
Since the Writing and Social Studies courses begin at the bottom of one column and continue to
the next column, we will create an extra line of text at the top of columns two and three to indicate
that these subjects are continued from the previous column.
1. On the Template tab, click Assessments in the Web site banner.
2. On the Assessments tab, select Writing from the Course list.
3. Enter Writing (cont.) in the first empty row in the Assessment column.
4. Enter 75 in the Seq# column to position the assessment just before the Writes using main
idea and supporting details assessment.
5. Leave the Mark Type option blank since this assessment is a subheading and does not
require a calculated mark.
6. Click Save.
7. Select Social Studies in the Course list.
8. Enter Social Studies (cont.) in the first empty row in the Assessment column.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
315
Preview Report Card
9. Enter 125 in the Seq# column to position the assessment just before the Identifies goods
and services assessment.
10. Click Save.
Note: There is a known issue with assessments that are used as a subheading on
the report card and do not require a mark not displaying properly on the report
card. On the Requirements tab, in the Writing course, make sure to select the
check box in at least one of the reporting periods for the Writing (cont.)
assessment, save, deselect the reporting period, and save again. Repeat this
process for the and Social Studies (cont.) assessment. Use this workaround to
ensure that the Writing (cont.) and Social Studies (cont.) assessments display
properly on the report card.
Preview Subject Continued Assessments
1. Click Preview.
Preview the Report Card
2. Close the RTF report card file.
3. On the Requirements tab, click Template in the Web site banner.
Add End of Year Placement to Template
Since there is room under the Teacher Comments in the second column on the first page of the
report card, we can insert the End of Year Placement template piece.
1. On the Template tab, enter 120 in the first blank row in the Seq# column.
2. Select End of Year Placement (Promoted, Placed, Retained) in the Option list.
3. Select Attendance in the Course list.
4. Enter 0 in the Rows After column.
316
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Preview Report Card
5. Click Save.
End of Year Placement (Promoted, Placed, Retained) Entry on the Template Tab
Preview End of Year Placement
1. Click Preview.
End of Year Placement Template Piece Under the Teacher Comments
2. Close the RTF report card file.
3. On the Template tab, click Messages in the Web site banner.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
317
Preview Report Card
Adjust Messages Using RTF Code
Since there isn’t a legend for the Work Habits & Skills course, we can create one using check
marks and plus and minus symbols that will display immediately above the course on the report
card. We can also combine the explanation of marks messages we entered previously to display
in one box instead of three boxes with space between individual lines and a border around the
Explanation of Marks title.
1. On the Messages tab, type the following text in the Message 5 field:
{\fs16 {\box{\brdrdb {\qj \b {\f14\fs16 {\field{\*\fldinst SYMBOL 252 \\f"Wingdings" \\s
10}{\fldrslt\f14\fs16}}}+ = Excellent
{\f14\fs16 {\field{\*\fldinst SYMBOL 252
\\f"Wingdings" \\s 10}{\fldrslt\f14\fs16}}} = Average
{\f14\fs16 {\field{\*\fldinst
SYMBOL 252 \\f"Wingdings" \\s 10}{\fldrslt\f14\fs16}}}- = Needs Improvement{\par}}}}}
Inserted RTF Code
2. Click Save.
3. Type the following RTF code in the Message 6 field.
{\box{\brdrdb \qc \fs24 Explanation of Marks{\par}}}
{\box \brdrs \fs20
{\tab}{\tab}{\tab}b = Beginning{\par}
{\tab}{\tab}{\tab}d = Developing{\par}
{\tab}{\tab}{\tab}s = Secure{\brdrbtw \brdrs {\par}}
{\tab}{\tab}{\tab}4 = Excellent{\par}
{\tab}{\tab}{\tab}3 = Good{\par}
{\tab}{\tab}{\tab}2 = Needs Improvement{\par}
{\tab}{\tab}{\tab}1 = Unsatisfactory
4. Click Save.
Creating a Box Around the Explanation of Marks Legend with RTF Code
318
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Preview Report Card
Entering {\tab} RTF Code to Indent and {\par} RTF Code to Force a Line Break
5. Click Template in the Web site banner.
6. On the Template tab, enter 45 in the first empty row in the Seq# column.
7. Select Message 5 (no border) in the Option column.
8. Enter 0 in the Rows After column.
9. Scroll to Seq# 240 and change Message 2 (with a border) to Message 6 (no border) in
the Option column.
10. Click the check box in the Del? column for Seq# 250 Message 3 (with a border) and
Seq# 260 Message 4 (with a border).
Delete Message 3 (with a Border) and Message 4 (with a Border)
11. Change the number in the Rows After column from 1 to 3 for sequence numbers 210, 220,
230 and 240 to create more space between the template pieces on the report card.
12. Click Save.
Preview Messages Using RTF Code
1. Click Preview.
In the first column on the report card, notice the legend of marks between the Physical
Education and Work Habits & Skills courses. Also, in the third column, the Explanation of
Marks title displays inside of a border with the remaining explanation of marks centered
beneath it in one box.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
319
Associate Assessments with Mapping Identifiers in Reporting Periods – Mappings Tab
Preview Messages
2. Close the RTF report card file.
3. Click Mappings in the Web site banner.
Associate Assessments with Mapping Identifiers in Reporting
Periods – Mappings Tab
1. On the Mappings tab, select Attendance in the Course list.
2. Select the following mapping identifiers in the Q1 list for the attendance assessments.
Mapping ID
320
Assessment
#Present1#
Days Present
#Absent1#
Days Absent
#Tardy1#
Times Tardy
#Comment1#
Comments (do not exceed 495 characters)
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Associate Assessments with Mapping Identifiers in Reporting Periods – Mappings Tab
Mapping Identifiers for Assessments in the Reporting Period on the Mappings Tab
3. Click Save.
4. Continue to select the following mapping identifiers in the Q2 list for the attendance
assessments.
Mapping ID
Assessment
#Present2#
Days Present
#Absent2#
Days Absent
#Tardy2#
Times Tardy
#Comment2#
Comments (do not exceed 495 characters)
5. Continue to select the following mapping identifiers in the Q3 list for the attendance
assessments.
Mapping ID
Assessment
#Present3#
Days Present
#Absent3#
Days Absent
#Tardy3#
Times Tardy
#Comment3#
Comments (do not exceed 495 characters)
6. Continue to select the following mapping identifiers in the Q4 list for the attendance
assessments.
Mapping ID
Assessment
#Present4#
Days Present
#Absent4#
Days Absent
#Tardy4#
Times Tardy
#Comment4#
Comments (do not exceed 495 characters)
7. Continue to select the following mapping identifiers in the YEF list for the assessments.
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
321
Associate Assessments with Mapping Identifiers in Reporting Periods – Mappings Tab
Mapping ID
Assessment
#Present5#
Days Present
#Absent5#
Days Absent
#Tardy5#
Times Tardy
#Promoted#
Promoted to grade
#Placed#
Placed in grade
#Retained#
Retained in grade
8. Click Save.
Mapping Identifiers for Assessments in Reporting Periods on the Mappings Tab
9. Select Letter & Sound Recognition in the Course list.
10. Select #A1# in all of the reporting periods and AY lists for the A assessment.
11. Continue to select the mapping identifiers that include 1, which represent the uppercase
letters, in the remaining three reporting periods and AY lists for all the remaining
uppercase letter assessments through Z.
Note: It’s a good idea to Save after you fill in all the rows on the screen so that if
the Internet connection is lost you will only lose the data since the last time you
saved and not all of it.
12. Continue to select the mapping identifiers that include 2, which represent the lowercase
letters, in all the reporting periods and AY lists for all the lowercase letter assessments, a
through z.
13. Click Save.
14. Continue to select the mapping identifiers that include 3, which represent the letter sounds,
in all the reporting periods and AY lists for all the letter sounds assessments.
15. Click Save.
322
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Check Spelling on Report Card
Check Spelling on Report Card
You can use the Spell Check feature to check the text on the report card for spelling errors.
1. Click Preview in the Web site banner.
2. Click the Spell Check icon in Microsoft Word to begin searching for spelling errors.
3. Notice that “responsiblity” is misspelled in the Accepts responsiblity assessment in the
Work Habits & Skills course.
Run the Spell Check
4. Do not correct the error, but close the spell check feature.
5. Close the RTF report card file.
6. On the Mapping tab, click Assessments in the Web site banner.
7. On the Assessments tab, select the Work Habits & Skills course in the Course list.
8. Scroll to the Accepts responsiblity assessment with the spelling error and correct it.
9. Click Save.
Correct Spelling Errors in the Assessments
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
323
Compile Report Card
Compile Report Card
The report card or interim must be compiled successfully before teachers can use it to enter
grades on the Report Card Entry screen. ProgressBook GradeBook runs numerous verifications
to make sure the report card is set up properly. Once the report card has been compiled, each
time it is changed, it must be recompiled. The status displays in the Compile Results column on
the Report Cards screen where you can easily see if the report card contains warnings or errors.
1. On the Web site banner, click the Compile link.
The compiled report card or interim displays in a separate browser window listing any
warnings or errors that were detected during compilation. A reference number displays
next to the description of each warning or error. This reference number is used for
troubleshooting purposes by ProgressBook GradeBook Support personnel.
Error and Warning Messages from the Compile Tab
The following warnings and/or errors may occur:
•
Warning – Potential errors were found during compilation, but teachers can use the
report card to enter grades on the Report Card Entry screen. It is recommended to
investigate the warnings and try to correct any issues.
•
Critical error – Errors were found during compilation that prevent the report card
from displaying and teachers from entering grades on the Report Card Entry screen
until they are corrected.
•
Severe error – Errors were found during compilation that prevent teachers from
entering grades on the Report Card Entry screen until they are corrected.
If there are no warnings or errors, the following message displays. “Congratulations, no
errors were found! The report card compiled successfully.” Proceed with step 7.
2. If there are any warnings or errors, review the description, and then click the Go link.
The screen where the issue occurred that caused the warning or error displays behind the
Compiled Report Card/Interim screen.
3. Troubleshoot the issue(s) as needed.
4. Return to the Compiled Report Card/Interim screen, and then click Refresh.
324
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
Compile Report Card
If the warning or error was corrected, it does not display in the list. Proceed with step 5. If
the warning or error was not corrected, repeat step 2 through step 4 until the issue is
corrected. If you cannot correct the issue, follow your appropriate ProgressBook
GradeBook support channel.
5. On the Web site banner, click the Compile link again.
6. If the report card compiled without critical or severe errors, close the Compile Report
Card/Interim screen.
7. On the Web site banner, click the General tab.
8. Select the Active report card mode to make the report card available to teachers to enter
grades.
9. Click Save.
10. On the Web site banner, click the Compile link for the final time.
11. Close the Compile Report Card/Interim screen.
Note: If you have to make changes to a report card in Active mode, you must first
change the report card mode to Testing.
Note: You can compile a report card without opening it on the Report Cards
screen by clicking the Compile All Active Changed Report Cards link or by clicking
in the Actions column.
Completed Standards-Based Report Card in RTF Format – Page 1
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
325
Compile Report Card
Completed Standards-Based Report Card in RTF Format – Page 2
326
ProgressBook GradeBook System Manager Guide
">